2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义定语从句与状语从句
Julia was good at German, French and Russian, all of ______ she spoke fluently. (2011·湖南卷25)
A. who B. whom C. which D. that
【解析】选C。前面谈到了3种语言即German，French和Russian，它们为先行词。all of which ＝of which all＝and all of them，作非限定性定语从句。
考点1.限制性定语从句和非限制性定语从句的比较：
Ⅰ. 定语从句
限制性定语从句 非限制性定语从句
形式 其前无逗号 其前有逗号
翻译 译在先行词前(即：从句译作先行词的定语) 译成与主句并列的一个分句(即：译作两句)
功能 修饰名词或代词 可修饰名词或代词，也可修饰整个主句
关系词 可用that引导；作宾语的关系代词常可省 不可用that引导；关系词一律不省
意义 起限制作用(若被省去，原句意义不完整) 起补充说明作用(若被省去，原句意义不受影响)
考点2.介词+关系代词连用时，介词的选用
She showed the visitors around the museum, the construction ______ had taken more than three years. (2011·江西卷34)
A. for which B. with which C. of which D. to which
【解析】选C。博物馆的建设花了3年多时间。我们可以说whose construction，也可以说the construction of which＝of which the construction，介词of 表所属关系。
介词提前时，定语从句的形式为：介词+which/whom, 不能用that或who。介词的选用一般根据后边动词与介词的搭配关系选择。
考点3.as和which引导非限制性定语从句的比较
例1：Ted came for the weekend wearing only some shorts and a T shirt, ______ is a stupid thing to do in such weather. (2011·全国大纲卷7)
A. this B. that C. what D. which
【解析】选D。which引导非限定性定语从句。代指前句整个内容。
例2： ______ is know to everybody, the moon travels round the earth once every month.
A. It B. As C. That D. What
【解析】选B。A、D不能引导定语从句，C不能引导非限定性定语从句。As is known to everybody＝As everybody knows “正如大家所知道的”。该句也可换成It is known to everybody that the moon travels round the earth once every month. ＝What is known to everybody is that the moon travels round the earth once every month.
as和which的相同点：
(1)先行词都可指代整个主句；
(2)都可在从句中作主语、宾语或表语。
as和which的不同点：
(1)as引导的从句可位于句首，而which则不行；
(2)as有“正如……”之意，而which表示“这一点”。
考点4.关系代词与关系副词的选用
I will never forget the day ______I came to my university and the day ______I spent in a new city.
A. when; which B. which; when C. what; that D. on which; when
【解析】 选A。第一个时间名词the day 在从句中作状语，因此要用关系副词when；第二个时间名词the day 在从句中作动词spent的宾语，因此要用关系代词which或that来引导定语从句或省略关系代词。
如果先行词是时间、地点或理由，而引导词在从句中作时间、地点、原因等状语时，引导词用when, where, why；有时尽管先行词是时间、地点或理由，但是引导词在从句中不作状语，而是作主语、宾语或表语，引导词则用that或which。
Men are more suited to occupational environments ______ require decisive action while women are better at jobs ______ a considered approach is most important. (江苏南京金陵中学高三第4次模拟卷)
A. which; that B. /; when C. which; when D. that; where
【解析】选D。第一空用关系代词that或which 作主语，不可以省略。第二空用关系副词where，因为句子意思完整，不缺主语或宾语。根据先行词job 和定语从句意思，确定用关系副词where＝at which表地点，作地点状语。
定语从句中如果先行词是地点，而引导词在从句中可作地点状语，引导词用where；如果先行词是时间，而引导词在从句中可作时间状语，引导词用when。
考点5.定语从句与同位语从句与强调句型的区别
Was it in the street ______ our school is located in ______ the car accident happened
A. where; that B. where; which C. that; which D. which; that
【解析】选D。本题考查定语从句和强调句型。第一空考查定语从句， that或which作第二个in的宾语；第二空考查强调句型。
1. 区别定语从句与同位语从句最简单的方法是：在先行词与从句之间加be动词，若句子成立，则是同位语从句；若句子不成立，则可能为定语从句。
The news that he has passed the exam pleased him and his family.
由于“The news is that he has passed the exam.”句子成立，因此“that he has passed the exam”是The news的同位语。
The news that he told me this morning is not interesting.
由于“The news is that he told me this morning”不成立，于是“that he told me this morning”不是The news的同位语，而是限定The news的定语从句。
2. 区别定语从句与强调句最简单的方法是：若将It is / was和that / who去掉而句中不缺成分，结构完整，说明原句是强调句型；若结构不完整，则说明原句可能为定语从句。
状语从句分为时间、地点、原因、条件、让步、结果、目的、方式及比较状语从句。
状语从句
考点1.when, while, as引导时间状语的特殊点
You can pay now or ______ you come back to pick up the bike.
A. when B. then C. while D. since
【解析】选A。come是短暂性动词，而while从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的，所以排除C, when引导时间状语从句，与now对称。
1. 表示带有规律性的“每当”或从句和主句的动作存在先后关系时，一般用when。
2. 表达“随着”或“一边……一边……”的含义，一般用as。
3. as作“当……时候”解，从句的谓语一般不可是状态动词。
4. while从句的谓语动词不可是短暂性的。
考点2.时间、条件状语从句的时态一致性
例1：The big fire lasted as long as 24 hours ______ it was brought under control. (山西太原五中2010— 2011学年度第二学期月考)
A. after B. before C. ahead D. since
【解析】选B。before 引导时间状语从句用于以下句型：
①时间段＋before从句表示“隔了多少时间才…”； ②it will be/ won't be long before从句，表示“很久就……/不久就……”。该句表示：大火一直持续了长达24小时才被控制住。
例2：As is reported, it is 100 years ______ Qinghua University was founded. (2011·四川卷6)
A. when B. before C. after D. since
【解析】选D。该句考查句型it is/has been ＋时间段＋since 从句。句意：清华大学已成立了100年了。since从句后的动词一般为非延续性动词，表动作的开始。
1. 句型“It will be+段时间+before从句”，表示“不久……就……”。从句用一般现在时代替一般将来时。
2. 句型“It is+段时间+since+一般过去时。”主句常用现在完成时，从句常用一般过去时。若从句谓语动词是延续性的，表示动作的终止；若从句谓语动词是短暂性的，则表示动作的开始。[来源:金太阳新课标资源网]
考点3. as引导状语从句的用法
例1：Try ______ she might, Sue couldn't get the door open. (2011·新课标卷22)
A. if B. when C. since D. as
【解析】选D。as 引导让步状语从句。Try as she might＝ Though she might try，该句型主要有以下几种形式：
①零冠词名词＋as ＋主语＋be ②形容词(＋名词)＋as ＋主语＋be ③动词原形＋as＋主语＋情态动词
as引导原因状语从句说明原因语气较弱，着重点在主句，常译为“由于，因为”。
例2：______ he was, he often ended up in financial troubles.
A. Though well paid B. As well paid C. Well paid as D. Well paid
【解析】选C。 此处as引导让步状语从句， well paid可看作形容词放于句首。
as/though引导让步状语从句时，意为“虽然”， 从句中的形容词、副词、名词(其前一般不用冠词)或动词原形放于句首构成倒装(though也可不倒装)。although 引导让步状语从句时不倒装；while 引导让步状语从句时只能位于句首。
考点4.what引导方式状语从句的用法
Reading is to the mind ______ food is to the body.
A. what B. that C. which D. of which
【解析】选A。该句意为“阅读之于心灵犹如食物之于身体”。
what引导方式状语从句，一般只用于A is to B what C is to D这一句型中，意思是“A对于B的重要性，就如同C对于D的重要性一样”。
考点5. such … as与such … that的区别
People were shocked by such a bloody murder in Virginia ______ no one experienced ever.
A. as B. which
C. where D. that
【解析】选A。as引导的定语从句， as常与such, the same搭配使用。
such…as引导的是定语从句， as须作主语、宾语、表语等；such…that引导的是结果状语从句， that不作成分。
考点6.表示“一……就……”的时间状语从句
— Did you keep it in mind to give Jennifer the money you owed her
— Yes, I gave it to her ______ I saw her.
A. while B. the moment
C. suddenly D. once
【解析】选B。the moment在此作连词，意思是“一……就……”。
1. as soon as常用一般现在时表将来。
2. hardly…when…或no sooner…than…结构中，主句谓语用过去完成时，从句谓语用一般过去时。
3. 表示时间概念的副词充当连词，如： immediately, directly, instantly等。
4. “the+瞬间名词”， 如： the moment, the minute, the second等。
考点7. while引导让步状语从句表示“尽管，虽然”的用法
______ all of them are strong candidates, only one will be chosen for the post. (2011·陕西卷19)[来源: http://wx.jtyjy.com/]
A. Since B. While
C. If D. As
【解析】选B。while表“尽管，虽然”，引导让步状语从句。其意义相当于although或though。句意：尽管他们所有人都是强有力的候选人对象，但仅有一个将被获选担任这个职位。2012届高考英语语法专题复习动词的-ing形式和不定式的用法
基础考点汇总：
1.动词-ing形式在句中可以做主语、表语、定语、宾语、状语和宾补。具体用法参看课本P108.
2. 动词不定式在句中除了不能做谓语外，可以充当任何成分。具体用法参看课本P108.
根据提示完成下列句子。
1. — What do you think made Mary so upset？
— __________ her new bicycle．(lose)
2. ________ new words is very useful to me. 学习生词对我很有用。
3. Would you mind ______________________ 打开窗户好吗？
4. ___________the good news, he jumped with joy. 听到这个好消息，他高兴得跳了起来。
5. ___________________this, the woman scientist expressed her satisfaction. 听到这一点，那位女科学家表示满意。
6. It is no use __________________(让他来帮忙). (ask)
7. Have you __________________(读完了) the book (finish)
8. My doctor advised __________________(多锻炼). （take）
9. This problem __________________(需要思考)carefully. (need)
10. ________________(乘火车来北京) takes about 3 hours. (come)
11. Would you __________________(介意我打开) the window (mind)
12. I apologize for __________________(没有遵守) my promise. (keep)
13. Ann has been __________________(期望来到) China for a long time. (look)
14. The bus stopped ___________________ passengers 车停下来以便接乘客。
15. I have nothing ____________ on this question. 对这个问题我无可奉告。
巩固强化练习：
1. As I'll be away for at least a year, I'd appreciate ________ now and then telling me how everyone is getting along.
A. hearing B. to hear C. to be hearing D. having heard
2. The teacher didn’t feel like ______ them on the spot.
A. correct B. correcting C. to correct D. corrected
3. With the old man ________ the way, we had no trouble in ________ that cave.
A. leads, find B. leading, finding C. led, to find D. was leading, found
4. I remember __________ for the job, but I forget the exact amount.
A. to pay B. paying C. to have paid D. being paid
5. He was seen ___________ out.
A. go B. to go C. went D. goes
6. He hasn’t got used ________ in the countryside.
A. live B. to live C. to living D. living
7. We don’t allow ________ in the lecture room.
A. to smoke B. smoke C. smoking D. to smoking
8. I’m looking forward to __________ from you soon.
A. hear B. heard C. hearing D. being heard
9. She doesn’t mind _________ at home alone though she may feel lonely.
A. leave B. being left C. leaving D. to be left
10. People from all the corners came to the city, __________ it very crowded.
A. to make B. and making C. made D. making
11. ________ all the time is the key to _________ progress in English.
A. Practise, making B. To practise, making
C. Practise, make D. To practise, make
12. Only one of these books is ____________.
A. worth to read B. worth being read C. worth of reading D. worth reading
13. ________is a good form of exercise for both young and old.
A. The walk B. Walking C. To walk D. Walk
14. She reached the top of the hill and stopped _________ on a big rock by the side of the path.
A. to have rested B. resting C. to rest D. rest
15._________ a reply, he decided to write again.
A. Not receiving B. Receiving not
C. Not having received D. Having not received
16. European football is played in 80 countries, ________ it the popular sport in the world.
A. making B. makes C. made D. to make
17. One learns a language by making mistakes and __________ them.
A. correct B. correcting C. corrects D. to correct
18. __________ at the door before entering please.
A. Knocked B. To knock C. Knocking D. Knock
19. ________ such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean
up the river.
A. Having suffered B. Suffering C. To suffer D. Suffered
20. He sent me an-email, __________ to get further information.
A. hoped B. hoping C. to hope D. hope
21. Tony was very unhappy for ________ to the party.
A. having not been invited B. not having invited
C. having not invited D. not having been invited
22. Though ________money, his parents managed to send him to university.
A. lacked B. lacking of
C. lacking D. lacked in
23. How about the two of us ________a walk down the garden
A. to take B. take
C. taking D. to be taking
24. ________is a good form of exercise for both young and old.
A. The walk B. Walking
C. To walk D. Walk
25. —I must apologize for ________ahead of time.
—That’s all right.
A. letting you not know B. not letting you know
C. letting you know not D. letting not you know
参考答案
1---5 A B B D B 6---10 C C C C D
11---15 D D B C C
16---20 A B C A B 21---25 D B C B B2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义数词
数词主要分为基数词和序数词两类。
一、 数词的分类
1. 基数词
表示数目的词称为基数词。其形式如下：
A．从1——10
one，two，three，four，five，six，seven，eight，nine，ten．
B．从 11——19
eleven，twelve， thirteen， fourteen， fifteen， sixteen， seventeen，eighteen， nineteen．
这里除 eleven， twelve， thirteen， fifteen， eighteen为特殊形式外，fourteen，sixteen，seventeen，nineteen都是由其个位数形式后添加后缀-teen构成。
C．从 21——99
整数几十中除twenty，thirty, forty，fifty，eighty为特殊形式外，sixty，seventy，ninety都是其个位数形式后添加后缀-ty构成。表示几十几时，在几十和个位基数词形式之间添加连字符“-”
21 twenty-one 76 seventy-six
D．百位数
个数基数词形式加“hundred”，表示几百，在几十几与百位间加上and．
101 a hundred and one 320 three hundred and twenty
648 six hundred and forty-eight
E．千位数以上
从数字的右端向左端数起，每三位数加一个逗号“，”。从右开始，第一个“，”前的数字后添加 thousand，第二个“，”前面的数字后添加 million，第三个“，”前的数字后添加 billion。然后一节一节分别表示，两个逗号之间最大的数为百位数形式。
2,648 two thousand six hundred and forty-eight
16,250,064 sixteen million two hundred and fifty thousand sixty-four
5,237,166,234 five billion，two hundred and thirty-seven million，one hundred and sixty-six thousand，two hundred and thirty-four
F．基数词在表示确切的数字时，不能使用百、千、百万、十亿的复数形式；但是，当基数词表示不确切数字，如成百、成千上万，三三两两时，基数词则以复数形式出现。
There are hundreds of people in the hall． 大厅里有数以百计的人。
Thousands and thousands of people come to visit the Museum of Qin Terra-Cotta Warriors and Horses every day．
每天有成千上万的人来参观秦兵马涌博物馆。
They went to the theatre in twos and threes． 他们三三两两地来到了剧院。
G．表示人的不确切岁数或年代，用几十的复数形式表示。
He became a professor in his thirties． 他三十多岁时成为了教授。
She died of lung cancer in forties． 她四十来岁时死于肺癌。
It was in the 1960s． 那是在二十世纪六十年代。
H．基数词的句法功能
基数词在句中可作主语、宾语、定语、表语、同位语。
The two happily opened the box． 两个人高兴地打开了盒子。（作主语）
I need three altogether． 我总共需要三个。（作宾语）
Four students are playing volleyball outside． 四个学生在外面打排球。（作定语）
We are sixteen． 我们是16个人。（作表语）
They three tried to finish the task before sunset． 他们三个人尽力想在日落前完成任务。（作同位语）
2. 序数词
表示顺序的词称为序数词。序数词的主要形式：
A．从第一至第十九 其中，one— first， two— second， three— third， five— fifth，eight—eighth，nine—ninth，twelve— twelfth为特殊形式，其它的序数词都是由其相对应的基数词后面添加“th”构成。例如： six— sixth、nineteen— nineteenth．
B．从第二十至第九十九
整数第几十的形式由其对应的基数词改变结尾字母y为i，再加“eth”构成。
twenty——twentieth thirty——thirtieth
表示第几十几时，用几十的基数词形式加上连字符“－”和个位序数词形式一起表示。
thirty-first 第三十一 fifty-sixth 第五十六 seventy-third 第七十三
ninety-ninth 第九十九
C．第一百以上的多位序数词
由基数词的形式变结尾部分为序数词形式来表示。
one hundred and twenty-first 第一百二十一
one thousand，three hundred and twentieth 第一千三百二十
D．序数词的缩写形式
有时，序数词可以用缩写形式来表示。主要缩写形式有。
first——lst second——2nd third——3rd
fourth——4th sixth——6th twentieth——20th
twenty-third——23rd
其中lst，2nd，3rd为特殊形式，其它的都是阿拉伯数字后加上th。
E．序数词的句法功能
序数词在句中可作主语、宾语、定语和表语。
The second is what I really need． 第二个是我真正需要的。（作主语）
He choose the second． 他挑选了第二个。（作宾语）
We are to carry out the first plan． 我们将执行第一个计划。（作定语）
She is the second in our class．在我们班她是第二名。（作表语）
注：序数词在使用时，通常前面要加定冠词 the；但是如果序数词前出现不定冠词a或an时，则表示“再——”，“又——”。
We’ll go over it a second time． 我们得再念第二遍。
We’ve tried it three times．Must we try it a fourth time 我们已经试过三遍了，还必须试一次（第四次）吗？
另外，基数词也可以表示顺序。只需将基数词放在它所修饰的名词之后即可，不需要添加定冠词。
the first lesson——Lesson One
the fifth page——Page 5（five）
the twenty-first room——Room 21（twenty-one）
二、时刻表示法
1. 表示几点钟用基数词加可以省略的o’clock
5:00 读作 five o’clock 或 five
2. 表示几点过几分，在分钟后加past，再加小时
five past seven 七点过五分 half past six 六点半
a quarter past eight 八点过一刻 seven past eight 八点过七分
3. 表示几点差几分，在分钟后面加to，再加小时
ten to eight 差十分八点（七点五十分） a quarter to twelve 差一刻十二点（十一点四十五分）
twenty to six 差二十分六点（五点四十分）
在日常生活中，常用下列简单方法表示时间。以小时、分种为单位分别读出数字。
6:31 读作 six thirty-one 10:26读作 ten twenty-six
14:03 读作 fourteen o three 16:15 读作 sixteen fifteen
18:30 读作 eighteen thirty 23:55 读作 twenty-three fifty-five
注：时刻表上的时间大多采用24小时表示法，这样就不需要用a.m.表示上午，p.m.表示下午了。
三、年月表示法
1. 世纪可以用定冠词加序数词加世纪century表示，也可以用定冠词加百位进数加’s表示
the sixth（6th）century 公元六世纪 the eighteenth（18th）century 公元十八世纪
the 1900’s 二十世纪 the 1600’s 十七世纪
这里，用百位数整数表示的世纪比这一百位阿拉伯数字本身多一个世纪。
2. 年代用定冠词及基数词表示的世纪加十位整数的复数形式构成
in the 1930’s（in the thirties of the twentieth century或 in the nineteen thirties） 在二十世纪三十年代
in the 1860’s（in the sixties of the 19th century或 in the eighteen sixties） 在十九世纪六十年代
In the 1870’s when Marx was already in his fifties，he found it important to study the situation in Russia，so he began to learn Russian． 在十九世纪七十年代当马克思已经五十多岁时，他发现研究俄国的形势很重要，便开始学习俄语。
3. 表示某年代的早期、中期和晚期，可以在定冠词后，年代前添加 early，mid-，late
in the early 1920’s 在二十世纪二十年代早期
in the mid-1950’s 在二十世纪五十年代中期
4. 年月日表示法
A．年份用基数词表示，一般写为阿拉伯数字，读时可以以hundred为单位，也可以以世纪、年代为单位分别来读。
1949 读作 nineteen hundred and forty-nine 或 nineteen forty-nine
1800 读作 eighteen hundred
253 读作 two hundred and fifty-three或two fifty-three
1902 读作 nineteen hundred and two或 nineteen o two
表示在哪一年，一般在年数前加介词in，使用year时，year放在数词之前。
in the year two fifty-three B.C. 在公元前253年
但是，通常采用in加表示年份的阿拉伯数字。
B. 月份，在哪个月用介词in加第一个字母大写的月份词表示。例如：in May在五月； in July在七月。为了简便起见，月份与日期连用时，月份常用缩写形式表示。缩写形式除May，June，July外，其它的月份都由其前三个字母表示，但September除外。
January——Jan．一月 February——Feb．二月 March——Mar. 三月 April——Apr．四月
August——Aug．八月 September——Sept．九月 October——Oct．十月
November——Nov．十一月 December——Dec．十二月
注：这里缩写形式后面加点不能省略，因为它是表示缩写形式的符号。
C．日期用定冠词the加序数词表示。在哪一天要添加介词on。
National Day is on Oct. 1. 国庆节是十月一日。（读作 October first）
此句也可以表示为 National Day is on the 1st of October．
May 5 五月五日（读作May fifth） 也可以表示为the fifth（5th）of May
Mar. 1（st） 三月一日（读作March first或 the first of March）
5. 表示不具体、不确切的时间，如世纪、年代、年份、月份时，用介词in表示，表示具体确切的某一天用介词on表示通常情况下morning，afternoon，evening等词前用介词in。但是，当这些词前后有一修饰限定的词作为定语，把它们限定为某一天早晨、下午或晚上时，介词in应改为on。这里的修饰限定词可以是介词短语、名词、形容词、定语从句等。
On a cold morning，the old man died lonely in his house．
在一个寒冷的早晨，这个老人孤独地死在自己的房子里。
I don’t want to be disturbed on nights when I have to study．
我不愿意在我必须学习的晚上被打扰。
The accident happened on the afternoon of July 7． 这次事故发生在7月7日下午。
We are to have a small test on Monday morning． 星期一早晨我们将进行一次小测验。
四、加减乘除表示法
1. “加”用plus，and或add表示；“等于”用is，make，equal等词表示。
2+3= 可表示为： How much is two plus three
2+3=5
Two plus three is five．
Two and three is equal to five．
Two and three make five．
Two added to three equals five．
If we add two to/and three, we get five．
二加三等于五
2. “减”用 minus或 take from表示
10－6＝ How much is ten minus six
10-6=4
Ten minus six is four．
Take six from ten and the remainder is four.
Six (taken) from ten is four．
十减去六等于四
3. “乘”用time（动词）或multiply表示
3X4＝ How much is three times four
3X4=12
Three times four is/are twelve．
Multiply three by four，we get twelve．
Three multiplied by four makes twelve．
三乘以四等于十二
4. “除”用divide的过去分词形式表示
16÷4= How much is sixteen divided by four
16÷4＝4
Sixteen divided by four is four．
Sixteen divided by four equals/gives/makes four．
十六除以四等于四。
五、分数表示法
1. 分数是由基数词和序数词一起来表示的。基数词作分子，序数词作分母，除了分子是“1”以外，其它情况下序数词都要用复数形式。
3/4 three fourths或 three quarters
1/3 one third或a third
24/25 twenty-four twenty-fifths
3 1/4 three and one fourth或 three and one quarter
1/2 a half
1/4 one quarter或a quarter
1 1/2 one and a half
1 1/4 one and a quarter
2. 当分数后面接名词时，如果分数表示的值大于1，名词用复数；小于1，名词用单数。
1 1/2 hours 一个半小时（读作 one and a half hours）
2 3/4 meters 二又四分之三米（读作two and three-fourths meters）
4/5 meter 五分之四米
5/6 inch 六分之五英寸
3. 表示“n次方”的说法：指数用序数词，底数用基数词。
10的7次方 the seventh power of ten（ten to the seventh power）
6的10次方 the tenth power of six（six to the tenth power）
六 、小数表示法
1. 小数用基数词来表示，以小数点为界，小数点左首的数字为一个单位，表示整数，数字合起来读；小数点右首的数字为一个单位，表示小数，数字分开来读；小数点读作 point，o读作 zero或o［ou］，整数部分为零时，可以省略不读。
0.4 zero point four或point four 零点四
10.23 ten point two three 十点二三
25.67 twenty-five point six seven 二十五点六七
l.03 one point o three 一点零三 2. 当数字值大于1时，小数后面的名词用复数，数字值小于1时，小数后面的名词用单数。
1.03 meters 一点零三米 0.49 ton 零点四九吨
l.5 tons 一点五吨
七、百分数表示法
百分数用基数＋percent表示
50％ fifty percent 百分之五十
3％ three percent 百分之三
0.12％ zero point one two percent 百分之零点一二
这里的percent前半部per表示“每一”，cent这一后半部分表示“百”，所以百分之几中percent不用复数形式。
八、数量表示法
1. 表示长、宽、高、面积等，用基数词+单位词（meter，foot，inch，kilogram等）+ 形容词（long，wide，high等）表示，或者用基数词+单位词 + in + 名词（length， width， height， weight等）表示。
two meters long或 two meters in length 2米长
three feet high或 three feet in height 3英尺高
four inches wide或 four inches in width 4英寸宽
This box is 2 kilograms in weight．
这个盒子有两千克重。
The city wall of Xi’an is 12 meters wide and 12 meters high．
西安城墙是12米宽，12米高。
2. 表示时间、距离时，使用含数词的名词所有格形式作定语。
five minutes’ walk 步行五分钟（的距离）
It’s an hour’s ride from my hometown to our university．
从我的家乡到我们大学是乘车一小时的路程。 或：从我的家乡到我们大学需要乘车一小时。
It’s three kilometers’ distance from our campus to the Bell Tower.
从我们校园到钟楼有三公里远。
3. 表示温度时，用below zero表示零下温度，温度用基数词+degree（s）+单位词（centigrade摄氏或Fahrenheit华氏）表示。
thirty-six degrees centigrade或 36℃ 摄氏 36度
four degrees below zero centigrade或 -4℃ 摄氏零下4度
Water freezes at thirty-two degrees Fahrenheit． 水在华氏三十二度时结冰。
Water boils at one hundred degrees centigrade． 水在摄氏一百度时沸腾。
这里的单位词在人们都很清楚是什么度量制度时，可以省略。
You are 37℃．（读作 thirty-seven degrees） 你是三十七度。（摄氏）
It’s seven degrees below zero． 今天是零下七度。（摄氏）
4. 由数词和其他名词构成的名词性短语作定语时，其中的名词用单数形式，名词性短语中各部分间要用连字符“-”来连接。
It’s a five-minute walk from the library to the playground． 从图书馆到操场需要走五分钟。
She’s a sixteen-year-old girl． 她是个十六岁的女孩。
5. 表示“比···大（或）几倍”的说法。
This room is two times bigger than that one． 这个房间比那个（房间）大两倍。
The dictionary is four times thicker than that book． 这本词典比那本书厚四倍。
My age is two times older than his． 我的年龄比他大两倍。
是骡子是马, 拉出来溜溜:
一、将下列数字写成英语：
1. 625 2． 8,961 3. 10,000 4. 20,405
5. 1/3 6. 5/6 7. 65％ 8. 1.25
二、选择填空。
1．March is ________month of a year．
A． a three B． the third C． a third
2．We will have a meeting at 8:05_______．
A．five to eight B．eight five C．eight o five
3．Eight plus eight is______________.
A．sixteen B．sixty-four C．one
4．He is an ______________boy．
A．eight years B．eight-year-old C．eight-years-old
5．We will have a___________ walk．
A．ten minutes B．ten minutes’ C．ten-minutes
6．The wall is___________.
A．four meters long B．four meter long C．four-meter long
7．What’s the date today It’s__________．
A．March the eight B．March eighth C．eight，March
8．It happened in the 1040’s．
A． in the forties of the eleventh century．
B． in the forties of the tenth century．
C． in the forty
9．About_____________ of the earth’s surface is covered with water.
A. three-fours B. three-fourth C. three-fourths
10. He went down to the village which was__________miles away from the city.
A. three hundreds B. three hundred C. three hundreds of
答 案：
一、1．six hundred and twenty-five 2．eight thousand nine hundred and sixty-one
3．ten thousand 4．twenty thousand four hundred and five
5．one third（a third） 6．five sixths
7．sixty-five percent 8．one point two five
二、1. B; 2．C; 3．A; 4．B; 5．B; 6. A; 7. B; 8. A; 9．C; 1O．B2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义独立主格结构
（一）：独立主格的概念
“独立主格结构”是由名词或代词作为逻辑主语，加上分词、形容词、副词、动词不定式或介词短语作为逻辑谓语构成。这种结构在形式上与主句没有关系，通常称为“独立主格结构”。
（二）：独立主格的功能
“独立主格结构”实质就是带有自己主语的非限制性状语从句。众所周知非限制性从句通常以主句的某一成分作为自己的逻辑主语，从而依附于主句。而有些非限制性从句和无动词从句带有自己的主语，在结构上与主句不发生关系，因此成为独立主格结构。其实，虽然叫做独立主格结构，并不是真正的独立，它还是一种从属分句，在句中有多种作用。如：表原因、表条件、表方式、表伴随、表时间等，在句中通常起状语作用。
独立主格结构主要用于描绘性文字中，其作用相当于一个状语从句，常用来表示时间、原因、条件、行为方式或伴随情况等。例如：
1) 表示时间
The meeting being over, all of us went home. 开完会后我们都回家了。
Her work done, she sat down for a cup of tea. 她干完了活，坐下来喝茶。
2） 表示条件
The condition being favorable, he may succeed. 若条件有利，他或许能成功。
3） 表示原因
There being no taxis, we had to walk. 没有出租车，我们只好步行。
He wrapped her up with great care, the night being dark and frosty. 夜又黑又冷，所以他把她裹得严严实实的。
4） 表示伴随情况
Almost all metals are good conductors, silver being the best of all. 几乎所有的金属都是良导体，而银则是最好的导体。(=Almost all metals are good conductors,
and silver is the best of all.)
（三）： 独立主格结构的构成：
名词(代词)+现在分词、过去分词；
名词(代词)+形容词 ( http: / / www.21cnjy.com / " \o "欢迎登陆21世纪教育网" \t "_blank )；
名词(代词)+副词；
名词(代词)+名词
名词(代词)+不定式；
名词(代词) +介词短语构成。
（四） 独立主格结构的特点：
(1）独立主格结构的逻辑主语与句子的主语不同，它独立存在。
2）名词或代词与后面的分词，形容词，副词，不定式，介词存在逻辑上的主谓关系，即逻辑主语为动作执行者。
3）独立主格结构一般有逗号与主句分开。
举例：（一）
1) 名词/代词+形容词
The men moved slowly forward, neck deep in the water, with their officers guiding them.
It stood silent in the noon sunlight, its door open.
2） 名词/代词+现在分词
Winter coming, it gets colder and colder. 冬天来了，天气越来越冷了。
The rain having stopped, he went out for a walk. 雨停了，他出去散步。
The question being settled, we wound up the meeting. 问题解决之后，我们结束了会议。
3） 名词/代词+过去分词
“Marquis,” said the boy, turning to the man, his eyes opened wide, and his right hand raised.
4） 名词/代词（主格）+不定式
We shall assemble at ten forty-five, the procession to start moving at precisely eleven. 我们十点四十五分集合，队伍十一点准时出发。
Here are the first two volumes, the third one to come out next month. 这是前两卷，第三卷将于下月问世。
We divided the work, he to clean the windows and I to sweep the floor. 我们进行了分工，他擦窗户，我扫地。
The two boys said good-bye to each other, one to go home, the other to go to his friend’s. 两个男孩彼此道了别，一个回了家，另一个去了他朋友家。
5） 名词/代词+介词短语
I followed him here, climbed in, sword in hand.
The huntsman entered the forest, gun in hand. 那位猎人手里提着枪走进了树林。
He sat at the table, coat off, head down, and pen in hand.
6） 名词/代词+副词
Nobody in, the thief took a lot of things away.
Lunch over, he left the house. But he was thinking.
7） 名词/代词+名词
he fought the wolf, a stick his only weapon. 他和狼搏斗着，唯一的武器是一根棍棒。
（二）
The test finished, we began our holiday.
= When the test was finished, we began our holiday.
考试结束了，我们开始放假。
The president assassinated, the whole country was in deep sorrow.
= After the president was assassinated, the whole country was in deep sorrow.
总统被谋杀了，举国上下沉浸在悲哀之中。
Weather permitting, we are going to visit you tomorrow.
如果天气允许，我们明天去看你。
This done, we went home.
工作完成后，我们才回家。
The meeting gone over, everyone tired to go home earlier.
会议结束后，每个人都想早点回家。
He came into the room, his ears red with cold.
他回到了房子里，耳朵冻坏了。
He came out of the library, a large book under his arm.
他夹着本厚书，走出了图书馆
2. With的复合结构作独立主格
表伴随时，既可用分词的独立结构，也可用with的复合结构。
with +名词(代词)+现在分词/过去分词/形容词/副词/不定式/介词短语
举例: He stood there, his hand raised.
= He stood there, with his hand raised【raising亦可】.
使用独立主格四点注意：
1.独立主格与状语从句的转换当状语从句的主语与主句的主语不是指同一个对象时，可用独立主格结构取代状语从句，但不再保留连词。如：After class was over (=Class being over / Class over), the students soon left the classroom.下课后，学生很快离开了课室。
2. 不能省略being (having been)的情形在下列两种情况下，独立主格结构中的being（或having been）不能省略。
(1) 独立主格的逻辑主语是代词时。如：It being Sunday, we went to church.因为是星期天，我们去了做礼拜。
(2)在There being＋名词的结构中。如：There being no bus, we had to go home on foot.因为没有公共汽车，所以我们不得不步行回家。
3. 通常不用物主代词或冠词在“名词（或代词）＋介词短语”构成的独立主格结构中，一般不用形容词性物主代词和冠词。如： Miss Smith entered the classroom, book in hand.史密斯小姐走进了课室，手里拿着一本书。比较with的复合结构。如：Miss Smith entered the classroom, with a book in his hand.
4. 独立主格结构没有所有格形式The chief-editor arriving, we began the meeting. 主编来了，我们开始开会。(比较动名词复合结构。)
独立主格结构的用法
独立主格结构主要表示谓语动词发生的时间、原因、条件或伴随情况等，相当于一个状语从句或并列句。
1. 用作时间状语：The work done (=After the work had been done), we went home. 工作完成后，我们就回家了。
2. 用作条件状语：Weather permitting (=If weather permits), they will go on an outing to the beach tomorrow. 如果天气允许的话，他们将在明天组织一次海滨小游。
3. 用作原因状语：An important lecture to be given tomorrow (=As an important lecture will be given tomorrow), the professor has to stay up late into the night. 因为明天要发表一个重要的演讲，教授不得不熬夜到很晚。
4. 用作伴随状语：He was lying on the grass, his hands crossed under his head (=and his hands were crossed under his head).他躺在草地上，两手交叉枕在脑后。
5.表示补充说明：We redoubled our efforts, each man working like two. 我们加倍努力，一个人干两个人的活。
*注：独立主格结构表示时间、条件或原因时，相当于一个状语从句，一般放在句首，表示原因时还可放在句末；表伴随状况或补充说明时，相当于一个并列句，通常放于句末。
典型例题
The murder was brought in, with his hands ___ behind his back。
A. being tied B. having tied C. to be tied D. tied
答案D. with +名词（代词）+分词+介词短语结构。当分词表示伴随状况时，其主语常常用with来引导。由于本句中名词"手"与分词"绑"是被动关系，因此用过去分词，选D.
注意:
1) 独立主格结构使用介词的问题：
当介词是in时，其前后的两个名词均不加任何成分（如物主代词或冠词），也不用复数。但 with 的复合结构不受此限制
A robber burst into the room, knife in hand.
( hand前不能加his)。
2) 当表人体部位的词做逻辑主语时，用现在分词表主动，用过去分词表被动。
He lay there, his hand clenched, his eyes looking straight up.
他握着拳头，眼睛直视地躺在那儿。
解析：拳头被握所以用过去分词表被动，眼睛直视是主动的所以用现在分词表示来修饰。
注意：不可断章取义地根据动词是否为及物动词来判断是否采用过去分词或现在分词！
典型例题：
Weather___, we'll go out for a walk.
A permitted B permitting C permits D for permitting
答案B. 本题中没有连词，它不是复合句，也不是并列句。 句中使用了逗号，且we 小写，可知其不是两个简单句。能够这样使用的只有独立主格或with的复合结构。据此判断，本句中使用的是独立结构， 其结构为：名词+分词。 由于permit在这里翻译为'天气允许'，表主动，应用现在分词，故选B。
如果不会判断独立结构作状语的形式，不妨将句子改为条件句，例如本句改为If weather permits, we'll go out for a walk. 然后将if 去掉，再将谓语动词改为非谓语动词即可。
独立主格结构妙题赏析
请看下面一道题：
Not far from the school there was a garden, _________ owner seated in it playing chess with his little grandson every afternoon.
A. its B. whose C. which D. that
【分析】此题很容易误选B，许多同学会认为句中逗号后是一个非限制性的定语从句，whose 在定语从句中用作定语修饰其后的名词 owner。此分析从表面上看，似乎天衣无缝，但实质上是错的，原因是空格后根本不是一个句子，因为没有谓语。尽管句中有两个动词，但它们都是非谓语动词。也许有的同学认为，其中的 seated 可视为谓语动词，但是注意，seat 用作动词时，它总是及物的，其后要么接宾语，要么它就用于被动语态，所以若在 seated 前加上助动词 is，则可以选择B（当然若将 seated 改为sitting，也应选择B）。所以此题最佳答案选A。
请再看一个类似的例子：
(1) He wrote a lot of novels, many of _________ translated into foreign languages.
A. it B. them C. this D. that
(2) He wrote a lot of novels, many of _________ were translated into foreign languages.A. it B. them C. which D. that
第(1)应选B，而不能选C，是因为句中的 translated 是过去分词(非谓语动词)，若选C，则该从句无谓语；第(2)应选C，因为句中有谓语 were translatedC。
再请看下面一例：
(3) He wrote a lot of novels, and many of _________ were translated into foreign languages.
A. it B. them C. which D. that
【分析】此题与上面的第(2)题不同，两句间多了一个并列连词and，说明这是一个并列句，故应选B，则不能选C。
请做做以下三题(答案均为B)：
(1) There I met several people, two of _________ being foreigners.
A. which B. them C. whom D. that
(2) There I met several people, two of _________ were foreigners.
A. which B. whom C. who D. that
(3) There I met several people, and two of _________ were foreigners.
A. which B. them C. whom D. that2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义情态动词与虚拟语气
1. — No one ______ be compared with Yao Ming in playing basketball.
— Oh, you are really his big fan. (2011·湖南卷28)
A. can B. need C. must D. might
【解析】选A。can强调能力，是“能，会”的意思。句意：在打篮球方面没有人能与姚明相比。你真是他的铁杆粉丝。
2. — I don't really like James. Why did you invite him
— Don't worry. He ______ come. He said he wasn't certain what his plans were. (2011·北京卷24)
A. must not B. need not C. would not D. might not
【解析】选D。根据句意，James可能不会来的。因为他自己不确信他的计划是什么。might not 表可能性，“可能不”。
情态动词
考点1. could与was/were able to的区别
Although the fire in the hotel was very big, they ______ escape from it.
A. can B. could C. was able to D. were able to
【解析】选D。A的时态不对， C选项主谓不一致。could和was / were able to虽都表过去的能力，但后者还表达“付诸了行动”的意思。
could一般只表过去的能力；若表示过去的能力得到了实施，一般用was / were able to, 不用could。
考点2.表示“可能性”的can, may, must
Liza______well not want to go on the trip — she hates traveling.
A. will B. can
C. must D. may
【解析】选D。句意： Liza极有可能不想去旅行——她讨厌旅行。may well not很可能不，表示否定猜测。
例2：It ______ be the postman at the door. It's only six o'clock. (2011·江西卷23)
A. mustn't B. can't
C. won't D. needn't
【解析】选B。 can't 表“不可能”，否定推测。根据前后句意思只能用can't。needn't“不必要”；mustn't表“禁止，不许”，won't表将来。
肯定推测一般用must, should, may/might或could(一般不用can), 其中， must的语气最强，意为“肯定”， should次之，意为“很可能，应该”， may/might语气最弱，意为“也许”。否定推测语气不很肯定时常用may/might not或could not, 意为“可能不，也许不”；否定语气较强时则用can't, 意为“根本不可能，想必不会”；用于疑问句表示惊异、怀疑的感彩时用can。
考点3. “情态动词+have done”的用法
例1：They ______ have arrived at lunchtime but their flight was delayed. (2011·新课标卷32)
A. will B. can
C. must D. should
【解析】选D。 should have done表“过去本应该做而未做的”。句意：他们本应该在午饭时候到达的，但是他们的航班误点了。must have done过去一定干过某事，表肯定推测。can have done表过去可能性，“过去本有可能干”。
例2：— I left my handbag on the train, but luckily someone gave it to a railway official.
— How unbelievable to get it back! I mean, someone ______ it. (2011·江苏卷34)
A. will have stolen B. might have stolen
C. should have stolen D. must have stolen
【解析】选B。might have done表过去很有可能已做某事。而must have done 则表示过去一定有人做过某事。如果被别人偷走了，那么就不可能把东西弄回。will have done 是将来完成时；should have done 过去本该做而未做。
must have done表示对过去事情的肯定推测。
can't / couldn't have done表示对过去所发生的事情所做的否定推测。
may have done表示过去所发生的事情作可能性推测。
might / could have done表示对过去所发生的事情作可能性推测，或者表示本来可以做而事实上未做的事情。
should / ought to have done表示本应该做的事情而事实上未做，含有对对方的责备。
needn't have done表示做了本不应该做的事情。
考点4.特殊情况
John promised his doctor he______not smoke, and he has never smoked ever since.
A. might B. should
C. could D. would
【解析】选D。考查情态动词在语境中的特殊用法。句意：约翰答应医生不再吸烟，从那以后，他再也没有吸过烟。由句意可知空格处表示意愿。
might 用作may的过去式，表示“可以，可能”；should 作情态动词，表示“应当”， 相当于ought to; could可用来代替can说明现在的情况，提出请求、想法、建议等；would 用于过去情况，表示“愿意”， “肯”， “会”等。
John, look at the time. ______ you play the piano at such a late hour
A. Must B. Can
C. May D. Need
【解析】选A。must在此表示特定的语气和态度，意为“偏要，硬要”。
1. can的几个习语
“can but +动词原形”表示“只能，大不了”。
“can't but +动词原形”表示“不得不”。
“can't help +动词 ing形式”表示“不得不，禁不住”。
“can't …too…”表示“无论怎样都不为过，越……越……”。
2. must有时表示 “偏要，偏偏”， 也可作名词，意为“必须做的事情”。
3. should可作“竟然、万一”解。
考点5. shall的3种用法
①表说话人的意图。在陈述句中主语是第二﹑三人称，表说话者给对方的承诺﹑决心﹑警告、威胁等；
②征求对方的意见或向对方提出请求时，主语为第一、三人称的疑问句。
③表示强制。用于法令、条约、规章中，意为“必须，应该”
— Will you read me a story, Mummy
— OK. You ______ have one if you go to bed as soon as possible. (2011·陕西卷24)
A. might B. must
C. could D. shall
【解析】选D。shall在此表“许可”。
虚拟语气
考点1.虚拟条件句的三种基本类型
I ______ through that bitter period without your generous help. (2011·陕西卷22)
A. couldn't have gone B. didn't go
C. wouldn't go D. hadn't gone
【解析】选A。句意：没有你的慷慨帮助，我就不可能熬过那段痛苦时期。此句为与过去事实相反的虚拟语气。without your generous help＝if I hadn't had your generous help。从句用过去完成时，主句则用情态动词＋完成时。couldn't have gone through表“过去不可能经历”。
1. 若与现在事实相反，条件从句的谓语用一般过去时(be通常用were), 主句谓语用“would (should, could, might)+动词原形”。
2. 若与过去事实相反，条件从句的谓语用过去完成时，主句谓语用“would (should, could, might)+have+过去分词”。
3. 若与将来事实相反，条件从句的谓语用一般过去时(be通常用were)或should+动词原形或were to+动词原形，主句谓语用“would (should, could, might)+动词原形”。
考点2. 使用虚拟语气的几种从句
— Where are the children The dinner's going to be completely ruined.
— I wish they ______ always late. (2011·北京卷28)
A. weren't B. hadn't been
C. wouldn't be D. wouldn't have been
【解析】选A。wish后有3种形式的虚拟语气句子。此句根据前一分句where are the children？可知是在问孩子现在在哪里？因此对方才会说我希望他们不要总是迟到。因此选A。
1. wish后的宾语从句和if only后的句子：表示与现在事实相反的愿望，从句谓语用一般过去时或过去进行时；表示与过去相反的愿望，从句谓语用过去完成时；表示将来没有把握或不太可能实现的愿望，常用“would (could)+动词原形”。
2. as if / as though引导的方式状语从句或表语从句：表示与现在事实相反，从句谓语用一般过去时或过去进行时；表示与过去事实相反，用过去完成时；表示将来的可能性不大，用“would (could)+动词原形”。
温馨提示：若从句所说的内容可能为事实，也可用陈述语气。
3. It's (high / about) time后的定语从句：从句谓语通常用一般过去时或“should+动词原形(should不可省)”。
4. would rather后的宾语从句：通常用一般过去时表示现在或将来的愿望，用过去完成时表示过去的愿望。
5. 一个“坚持”(insist)、两个“命令”(order, command)、三个“建议”(advise, suggest, propose)、四个“要求”(demand, require, request, ask)后的宾语从句：一般用“should+动词原形(should可省)”。
温馨提示：动词insist, suggest后的宾语从句除可用虚拟语气外，也可用陈述语气，注意区别。
6. It's+suggested, ordered, required, demanded等表示“建议、要求、命令”的动词的过去分词+that主语从句：常用“should+动词原形(should可省)”。
7. “要求、建议、命令”等意义的名词后的表语从句或同位语从句：从句中的动词也用“should+动词原形(should可省)”。
8. It's+important / necessary / impossible+that主语从句：常用“should+动词原形(should可省)”。
考点3. 虚拟语气的特殊情况
1. 错综时间虚拟条件句
Maybe if I ______ science, and not literature then, I would be able to give you more help. (2011·北京卷30)[来源:金太阳新课标资源网]
A. studied B. would study
C. had studied D. was studying
【解析】选C。考查虚拟语气的特殊用法——错综时间虚拟条件句。从句中含有then，可推知此句是一个与过去事实相反的虚拟语气，所以用过去完成时。而主句则用了与现在事实相反的would be。句意：也许如果我那时学习了理科而不是文学的话，那么(现在)我就能给你更多的帮助。
所谓错综时间虚拟条件句即条件从句与主句所指时间不一致，如从句指过去，而主句却指现在或将来，此时应根据具体的语境，结合上面提到的三种基本类型对时态作出相应的调整。
2. 含蓄虚拟条件句
I knew my uncle ______ no time. Otherwise he ______ me company to go hiking.
A. did have; would have kept
B. had; had kept
C. has; would have kept
D. had had; had kept
【解析】选A。本题考查强调和虚拟语气。第一句说的是事实，故不用虚拟语气， did 在此处表示强调；第二空表示对过去事实的虚拟，故用would have kept。
例2：We ______ John's name on the race list yesterday but for his recent injury. (2011·江西卷28)
A. will put B. will have put
C. would put D. would have put
【解析】选D。but for“要不是因为”。此句表示“要不是因为John最近受伤了，我们昨天就会把他的名字打入竞赛名单里。”受伤这一动作发生于过去，因此该句表与过去事实相反。主句用would have done的形式。
假设情况不用if从句来表示，而是用without, but for, otherwise, or, but等表示一种含蓄条件。表示与现在或将来相反，用“would (should, could, might)+动词原形”；表示与过去相反用“would (should, could, might)+have+过去分词”。
3. 虚拟语气的省略与倒装[来源:21世纪教育网]
______ in your position, I would go.
A. If I B. Were I
C. If was I D. If I am
【解析】选B。该结构可还原为： If I were in your position。
虚拟条件从句中若有were, should, had时，可将其提到句首，并将if省略。2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义As引导的从句
一、As引导让步状语从句
为了帮助同学们全面掌握让步状语从句的倒装用法，本文将这类语法现象归纳为以下五种句型：
1、名词 + as / though + 主语 + 动词
King as he was，he was unhappy. 他虽是国王，但他并不幸福。
Child as he is，he knows to help other. 他虽是个孩子，却知道帮助别人。
【说明】其中的动词通常为连系动词，也就是说位于句首的名词是其后连系动词的表语。另外，要特别注意位于句首的名词前习惯上不用冠词，即使其前有形容词修饰也不用冠词。比较：
Boy as ［though］ he is， he likes to play with girls.=Though he is a boy，he likes to play with girls. 他虽是男孩，却喜欢与女孩子玩。
Strong man as ［though］ he is，General Botha has been severely put to the test during the past few weeks.= Though he is a strong man， General Botha has been severely put to the test during the past few weeks. 波赛将军虽然坚强，但在过去的数周里也受到了严峻的考验。
2、形容词 + as / though + 主语 + 动词
Successful as he is，he is not proud. 他虽然成功，但不骄傲。
Improbable as it seems，it’s true. 虽然看起来不太可能，但却是真的。
Stupid as it sounds，I was so in love with her that I believed her. 尽管听起来很愚蠢，我是如此爱她竟然相信了她的话。
Patient as he was，he didn’t like waiting that long. 他虽说有耐心，也不愿等这么长。
Beautiful though the necklace was，we thought it was over-priced. 那条项链虽然很漂亮，我们认为价钱太高。
【说明】其中的动词也通常为连系动词，也就是说位于句首的形容词是其后连系动词的表语。
3、副词 + as / though + 主语 + 动词
Much as I like Paris，I couldn’t live there. 尽管我喜欢巴黎，但我不能住在那里。
Hard though they tried，they couldn’t make her change her mind. 尽管他们做了很大努力，却没法让她改变主意。
Fast as you read， you can’t finish the book in two days. 尽管你读得很快，你总不能在两天之内就读完这本书。
He was unable to make much progress，hard as he tried. 尽管他做了努力，却未能取得很大进步。
【说明】有的词典将 much as 作为习语看待，认为它是一个用以引导让步状语从句的复合连词。再如：
Much as I admire him as a writer，I do not like him as a man. 他作为一名作家我很佩服他，但我却不喜欢他这个人。
Much as I like you，I couldn’t live with you. 我尽管很喜欢你，却不能和你在一起生活。
4、动词原形 + as / though + 主语 + 动词
Object as you may，I’ll go.纵使你反对，我也要去。
Try as he might，he couldn’t solve the problem. 尽管他想方设法，却未解决这个问题。
Search as they would，they would find nobody in the house. 无论怎样搜查，他们在房子里仍然没有找到一个人。
Dislike him as we may，we must acknowledge his greatness. 尽管我们不喜欢他，但必须承认他的伟大。
Lose money as I did，we got a lot of experience. 钱虽然丢了，我们却得到了许多经验。
Fail in the election as he did，he became famous for his fiery speech against slavery. 尽管落选了，但他却以其反对奴隶制的激烈演说而出了名。
【说明】主语后的动词通常为 may，might，would，did 等情态动词或助动词(若表示情态意义，则选用情态动词；若陈述事实，则用 did，do 等助动词)。
5、分词 + as / though + 主语 + 动词
Raining hard as it is， I’m going out for a walk. 虽然正在下着大雨，我还是要出去散步。
Surrounded as we were by the enemy，we managed to march forward. 虽然我们被敌人包围着，但我们还是设法前进了。
Munching the apple as he was，he had got an eye for all John’s movements. 他尽管在一个劲地嚼着苹果，但仍警惕着约翰的一举一动。
6、补充说明
1）这类倒装的让步状语从句可用 as， though 来引导，不能用 although 来引导；但是，未倒装的让步状语从句却可用 though， although 来引导，而不能用 as 来引导。也就是说， although 引导让步状语从句时不能倒装，as 引导让步状语从句时必须倒装，而 though 引导让步状语从句时可以倒装也可以不倒装。如：
虽然很晚了，但我们还是继续工作。
正：Late as ［though］ it was，we still went on working.
正：Though it was late，we still went on working.
误：Late although it was，we still went on working .
误：As it was late，we still went on working.
2）上面提到的倒装结构有时也可用来表示原因，区别的办法主要看句子的内容：让步从句的内容大多数与主句在意义上相反，而原因从句则与主句之间有因果关系。比较：
Tired as he was，he sat up late studying at night. 昨晚他虽然很疲倦了，但还是学习到很晚才睡。(表让步)
Tired as he was，he went to bed early. 因为很累，所以他睡得很早。(表原因)
Young as he was，he was equal to the task. 他虽年轻，却能胜任这项工作。(表让步)
Young as he was，he was not equal to the task. 他因为年轻，所以不能胜任这项工作。(表原因)
3）在美国英语中，人们通常用 as...as 引导让步状语从句。如：
Cold as it was， we went out.=As cold as it was， we went out. 尽管天气冷，我们还是出去了。
Successful as he is， he is not proud.=As successful as he is， he is not proud. 他虽成功了，但不骄傲。
二、as 引导定语从句
as 的用法:(as 引导定语从句, 在定语从句中作主语、宾语、表语)
(一) 如为限制性的，多用于the same …as ; the same as；such …as …; as many/much as；so …as等结构中。如：
1. I have the same book as you (have). 我有一本和你的一样的书。
Her attitude to him was quite the same as it had always been. (关系代词as和指示代词same连用, 在从句中用作表语, 先行词是same.)
2.---Why didn't you mention that in face of the police just now
--- I thought it was such a minor detail as was hardly worth mentioning.
We will only discuss such problems as have something to do with our own interests.
Don't do such things as you are not sure about.
There is no such place as you dream of in all this world.
比较：I live in the same house that he used to live in.
I'm wearing the same shirt as you wore yesterday.
比较：Here is so big a stone as no one can lift. （定语从句）
Here is so big a stone that no one can lift it.（结果状语从句）
(二) 如为非限制性的，多单独引导一个定语从句，这种定语从句可置于句首，句中或句尾，译为"正如，这一点"。（动词常为know, see, expect, point out, etc.）
1. As we all know, smoking is harmful to one's health . (as 作宾语)
=As is known to all, smoking is harmful to one's health . （as 作主语）
=It's known to all that smoking is harmful to one's health .
或:Smoking is harmful to one's health , as we all know .（as 作宾语）
或: Smoking, as we all know, is harmful to one' health.
2.He was a foreigner, as I knew from his accent. (宾语, 先行词是前面整个句子)
当先行词被the same所修饰时，关系词既可以用as，也可以用that。在表示具体事物
时，有时两者有一定的区别。一般说来，表示同一种类多用as，表示同一事物多用that。
如：
This is the same instrument that I used yesterday.这就是我昨天用过的那台仪器。
This is the same instrument as I used yesterday. 这台仪器跟我昨天用过的那台一样。
在抽象概念上，同种类和同一事物是没有绝对区别的，所以两个词可换用：
I have the same opinion as / that you have.
这里要注意的是：
（1）使用as时，它引导的定语从句中的动词可以省略，但使用that时，定语从句中
的动词不可省略。如：
Women received the same pay as men.
Women received the same pay that men received.
(2) 在“the same…that”结构中，that只是用来加强语气，强调“相同”。that可以省去而不改变句子原意，甚至连名词前的same也可以省去。如：
This is the same instrument that I used yesterday.
= This is the same instrument I used yesterday.
= This is the instrument I used yesterday.
但在“the same…as”结构中，same和as都不能省略。
(3) 当“the same…that”结构中的that作为关系副词用时，不可以直接与as互换。
如：
He lives in the same building that I live.
= He lives in the same building as / that I live in.
Shall we meet at the same place that we last met
= Shall we meet at the same place that / as we last met at
7. 当先行词前有such, so, as时，关系词应当用as。如：
A wise man seldom talks about such things as he doesn’t understand.
He spoke in such easy English as everybody could understand.
At this time of the day, all buses and trolleys have to carry as many passengers as they can.
It is so easy a book as every schoolboy can read.
Let’s discuss such things as we can talk of freely.
另需注意：
This book is written in such easy English as beginners can understand.（定语从句）
This book is written in such easy English that beginners can understand.（结果状语从句）2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义阅读必备资料
一.文章的套路结构:（本笔记局限于说明文章，议论文章。）
1. 结论说明型
A．文章开始出现一个结论，后为对他的解释
B.TS(topical sentence即主题句)即为为结论出现支出；注意特别容易的情况是每一段之主题句是该段首句。
C.什么是“判断句”？---通常很重要，判断结论说明型靠判断句，直指主题
a.系表结构:be. remain
b.含有作者的态度和评价，注意可能有自由褒贬词
2.新老观点型
A.判断标志:
文章开始不久就出现了老观点,例如:
it was traditionally assumed
it was once / usually believed
Many ××believed that
Many ××have argued
It was frequently assumed that
It was universally accepted that
过去.传统.大家一致公认的观点,都是老观点。
B.TS:陈述新观点的句子。
C.新观点特征:
对同一focus给出不同的解释。
读到老观点的时候,应该停下来想一想,新观点可能是什么样子,从而往下有目的地寻找。
3.现象解释型
A.判断标志:首段给出一个自然的或社会的现象,往往很古怪,下文对其做出解释。
B.可能有多种解释,TS:作者给了正评价的解释。
C.需要注意的是:
a.可能先给出几个错误的(作者持负评价),最后一个才是正确的(正平价)。
b.可能所有解释作者全都不喜欢。
4.问题解决.回答型
A.判断标志:
a.手段出现了设问句。
b.首段出现了以下词语:problem difficulty task puzzle 等
B.TS:作者给出正评价的解决方案。
5.其他类的文章
前班部分是以上四种结构之一,后半部分讲了一些与前面无关的内容。
TS在前面,从前面不从后面
二.做题的几条原则
1.先读文章后做题也可以先看题在看文章，建议仔细看全文，才能把握主题不至于上当
2.不能凭印象,或自己的知识背景做题。这点我很有感触，作题不能想当然
2. 做细节题:必须找原文语言重现,正确选项为原文的精确改写。（难大题目用选项中的关键词语，扫描全文，此外在读原文时有意识的记一下
三．平常复习的建议
1．复杂句式――重点训练。推荐王若平的大学难句和考研难句，随便哪本都可以。价格好象是20大元。难句重点训练省略，倒装，复杂从句，等
2. 生词.词组:注意熟词僻义
3. 注意对找主题句绝对敏感；
4.重点把握:A文章结构；B作者态度。
具体作题思维：
下面是我的习惯。希望网友斧正
1. 第一遍读文章的时候,第一段的1-2句要重读，可能出主题，或是1-2句本身是作者要批驳的标把
其后几段
1)例子,注意考 in order to 题型,答案或前或后,例子的目的要比例子本身重要。如果细节题要注意选乡有变化，出题老师不会送分给你
2)“:” “--” 同义重复 “；” 相当于顺接连词
3)顺接连词:moreover ,furthermore等。
a. 前后作者态度一致,可以用于旁证作者态度；
b. 前面如果有不认识的动词或者形容词,后句还可以作挣扎；
c. 如果全段都没有结构连词,则缺省为顺接关系,段首为主句。
4)让步语气:
&S226;让步之后必有转折,转折部分一定要读懂强转折很可能出题；
&S226;如果转折句没有读懂,则回过头去看让步部分,取他的相反即可这样还是可以读懂句子。
5)观点.说法:
具体内容可以快速略去,关键要把握代表人物.作者态度。作者态度很重要，很可能出题
2.选项处理
1)直选法:精确定位是关键。
2)正确选项必须是原文的精确改写:
a.主动词:与原文同义或者近义；
b.直接宾语；
c.范畴:包括各种状语(时间.地点等).作用范围.人物群体等等。
3.排除法:
1)最重要的是文字对应法；
2)先应该纵向扫描选项,如果在讲同一对象,则先回原文定位,再做选择。
四.重点语言现象
1. 主题句
2. 每段的主体词、关键词（两三个）
3. 强对比（肯定、绝对要出题1)unlike, in contrast to, be distinguish from
2)时间:once, now, new, nowadays, current ideas, until, recently, past,
in 1950’s
3)最高级,唯一性
&S226;最高级:most, uttermost, foremost, least, always, never, first, last, all, every, any, each, none, -est
&S226;唯一性:only, sole, unique, exclusively, mere
关联对比词：a. Unlike（相反）b. Contrast c. On the other hand d. On the contrary
4. 强转折
虽然：However/While
但是：But, Yet, Whereas
In fact-Actually2. 强因果
Because/Since/For/冒号/分号
表所以：Thus/Hence/Therefore/Lead to/Result in/Result from/Lie in
表结论：Conclude/Conclusion/Conclusive
表后果：Consequent/Consequence
5. 强调词、强调性语言
1) 最高级
顺序最高级：First
频率最高级：Always/Never
程度最高级：Foremost/Uttermost/Utmost
2) 唯一性
Only/Sole(ly)/Unique(ly)/Exclusive(ly)/Alone(后置)
3) 比较级
More than/Less than/As…as…/Similar to/The same as
慎重对待题肢中的最高级、比较级
6. 专有名词
人名、物种（动植物）、化学物质、地名
Nevertheless-Nonetheless
Rather-Instead
Despite-In spite of
注意：
极端转折（最后半句是想说的）
多重转折三中标点符号
引号（引用某人原话；表强调；表负评价）——易出题
括号、破折号——表插入、补充、解释
6. 判断句（定性结论、提纲挈领）（可能是主题体）
1) 系动词、情态动词
Be/Remain/Seem/Can/Cannot/May/Might
2) 自由褒贬词
例：His (brazen/penetrating) view (successfully/curiously) changed our attitude
第二部分 题目类型
一.主题题型
(一)问main idea, primary purpose，title,etc
1.正确选项必须具备三个特征:
①有focus； ②无细节； ③态度与原文一致
--能找到TS则直接改写,找不到依据这三个特征使用排除法
2.先看选项的主体动词,迅速排除干扰项
①presentation型的文章
present, describe, explain, illustrate, point out （此只是技巧有时靠不住）
②argumentation型的文章
evaluate, criticize, refute, challenge, counter, correct
--出现了则优先选（此只是技巧有时靠不住）
(二)问focus: 应直接定位TS
需要注意以下几点:
后面出现大段无关论述时:主题“从前不从后”；
从面TS已对某事物给了正态度,末尾再作转折,说一些毛病,缺点,这是倒让步,而不是文章的重点,不用考虑！
二.作者态度题型
态度题的做法：
判断依据：
1判断句（系动词、情态动词、自由褒贬词）前面两个好理解，自由褒贬词一说是新东方老师的称呼，这也是他教的方法。通过找它对判断作者态度很有作用，但前提是你对全文的结构逻辑把握的比较好，单纯通过自由褒贬词的判断还是不很保险，但这是一个思路，考研英语的语言难度不是太大，还是好判断的
2某些某些名人说话引号中的形容词或副词表评价（注意我上次改正的帖子，我也贴在这里
所谓名人态度题分两种，
1是问某人态度，可能出某人的ATTITUDE NOT INCLUDE。。。？ 2是主题的态度，借名人来造势
这就出现了
1作者的意见和名人的一致，要注意全文的起承转合，比较明显的词FOR EXAMPLE SUCH。。AS 。。SUCH AS。等等很多，自己平常作题时有意识记一下，只要知道下面的话是用来支持观点的，所以我说，例子的的目的要重要于例子本身，这种题容易丢分。
2作者的意见和名人的不一致，有时名人的话只是给文章好开个头，批的就是他。这就是观点对立式主题文章的类型，在文中的明显的词有：IS TEMPTED TO SAY，IT IS PRESUMELY BELIEVEED THAT 。。。等等，平常作题时有意识记一下，注意观点对立式这里就一定出现了意思的强转折，例如HOWER，BUT ，WHILE，ON THE CONTRARY 等等。而且在阐述作者本身观点时可能会有自由褒贬词，一定要小心呀
3一些实义动词表评价，尤其在讲原理，或研究的文章中：（我举了一些实际远不止这么多，建议自己总结一下
a. 负：fail to/overestimate/underestimate/exaggerate/
misinterpret/misrepresent/ignore/neglect/overlook
b. 正：find/discover/show/demonstrate/prove/confirm/determine
4） 让步：前半句是假话；后半句是真正要说的，转折：一般大负小正原则上以大为准兼顾小的，如果选乡中只有大的以大为准。
a. It is true/correct; Of course
b. No doubt; Undoubtedly
c. 助动词do/may/seem/appear
5） 从大不从小原则：从全文来讲，看前面、开头或主题讲的是什么评价。
2. 做题注意事项：
1） 避免极端选项，太激进的选乡，请注意极端选项排除法只是个辅助的方法，适用范围较窄。
2） 混和评价的正确选项的表达方式：
a. …but/and…
如：critical but admiring（大正小负）
correct but limited correct and incomplete
b. 由修饰词所限定的评价词：
partially (correct); qualified (approval)（打了折扣的，有限制的）；
guarded (criticism) （慎重的）；tentative (acceptance)（暂时的，尝试性的）
reluctant (criticism)（不情愿的）；enthusiasm tempered by minor reservation
还有INFER 题我真的对他没什么把握，他对应试者的素质要求很高。
三.该拿分的定位题
--需要重点练习迅速定位.精确改写的技巧！！细节题目有时考的很偏应尽量拿分再次提醒不要用背景知识答题。
1．in order to题型(example的作用？)
①原文先总结,后example,则应该往前定位
标志:for example/for instance/such as/like
②原文先example,后总结归纳,则应该往后定位
标志:thus, hence, conclusion
③如果没有任何标志,则前后为顺接关系,一般为先结论后举例,往前定位
2强对比取非题
①简单强对化
unlike, in contrast to, compared with
②时间强对比---时间可能有变化，比如原文1970S，选项为30 DECADES AGO，等等
3．态度题
4．主题问TITLE题
5，决大多数细节题，关键看你的敏感度和瞬间记忆，作完主题题再查找也可以。
本人做阅读两遍操作
下面说说我的思维过程（很多是新东方教的再结合网友经验）：
1第一段详细读,集中最高注意力的读,每一句都读（因为判断套路60%看第一段能做出个预测）.
2 每段首句好好读,尽可能多的把握其用意,尤其是和文章结构的关系,在这样结构的文章中充当什么角色 如果这一段写的是观点,则一定要读,不仅要读,还要思考,思考它在全文中的作用,思考它的启承转合。重点要读读新观点 如果这一段是个研究,试验,则明白它的研究对象, 看到启程转合,凝神静看。放慢速度. 如果这一段写的是观点,则一定要读,不仅要读,还要思考,思考它在全文中的作用,思考它的启承转合!其中重点读新观点,旧观点略! 如果这一段讲的是个具体的内容,进程,事件,原理...则基本不要读,知道他讲什么就够了!读转折词,这是为了看看是否有意外的观点!没有,则可以做题了! 遇到however ,in fact ,is driven to, purpose of, instead of, not...but..., unlike, contrast. 等等等有指导意义的词组,要慢读,并且使劲记住主体词!
例如涉及到谁,反对了什么。全文中for example, for instance等不读.想一下是针对谁举的例 子就可以,记住,例子的目的远远比内容要重要. 末句之重要!因为文章该结束了,作者一般在这 个时候必须给读者一个交待,所以通常讲出一些比较有指导意义的话! 对于文章末句要予以高度关注,尤其是末断的让步!一般不能撼动前面作者一直持续的态度,只是作者为了严谨客观起见的阐述.
3。同时划记号
如：
主题结构类(主题.organization.各段作用.各段结构.态度.写作；)
in order to题,imply题,所以遇到in order to一定要笔记；
大写名词,斜体字,一定要记
强对比(rather than. unlike.)
列举,3个以上的列举
连词(not..but..; not only..but also.. ;no longer ..but
缺陷,尤其是unless怎样怎样,就更好,一定要笔记
最后还有细节题。这种题型相对有一些难度,但是如果对段落的把握比较好,就好定。这要求在读文的时候有意识记住，对瞬间记忆要求高
4读完后不急作题，花10秒理一下思路和结构，先做主题题 INORDER TO 提等和全文有关的题目
5。细节题目，第二遍查找式阅读因为对主题把握的好，又记录了一些细节，所以相对速度还凑活
后记：
方法不是绝对，怎么方便怎么来，这也是我主持这次讨论的原因，对自己一段时间的学习做个检讨，总结。我的这些意见只提供参考，总之，作题，分析是为了提高分数，方法不是绝对，怎么方便怎么来，但我建议大家还是学会预测。顶级高手确实一遍就过。
一． 阅读的整体解题思路：三步走
1． 第一步：通读全文，抓住中心。（不推荐采用先看题目后读文章的做法）
在此过程中，注意把握三个阅读原则：
⑴原则一：1∶1原则（通读时间与做题时间对等）
⑵原则二：首段原则（不要怕重复和回读）首段的作用：①中心段 ②抛砖引玉
⑶原则三：首末句原则，即除首段和末段，其余各段的首末句一定要读懂，其他各句正常阅读
2． 第二步：仔细审题，返回原文。
3． 第三步：重叠选项，得出答案。具体来讲，可以设原文意思为A，选项意思为B
若A=B，则B为正确答案；
若A、B不相关，则B不为正确答案，即原文没有提到的，一定不是答案；
若B为A的反面，即B与A矛盾，则B不为正确答案；
若A的内容包含B，则B为正确答案；
若B的内容包含A，则B不为正确答案，属于扩大范围的错误；
若A、B有交集不重叠，则B不为正确答案。
必须记住：选一个选项应有选的理由，不选一个选项也应有不选的理由。
二． 宏观阅读技巧：
1． 一种文章模式：花开两朵，各表一枝。即在文章开始提出两个核心概念，随后分段论述。这种文章关键是两个概念的定义，以及它们的区别和联系。
2． 一种文章模式：出现独句段，即一个句子单独成段。特别是当其出现在文章最开始或结束的时候，它一般是文章的中心思想。
3． 一种文章模式：层层递进。文章整体或几个段落论述的问题有从抽象到具体、从初级到高级、从简单到复杂的过程，且各段开始都出现递进词。这种文章的中心或几段的核心观点必然出现在层层递进各段的最后一段。
4． 一种文章模式：问题答案型（question-answer）。文章第一段中出现一个问题，在随后各段提供该问题的答案。这种文章的中心就是该问题最直接最主要的答案。
5． 时文的特点：⑴耸人听闻，吸引眼球 ⑵貌似客观 ⑶抛砖引玉
一般来说，时文的中心会出现在首段的最后一句话或第二段的首句。
三． 微观阅读技巧：
1． 句子中的标点符号的作用：
⑴ 句号：用来分割句子。
⑵ 逗号：两个逗号之间或一个逗号之后，是一个补充说明成分，可以先不看。
⑶ 冒号：冒号前后是从抽象到具体的过程，后面进一步具体说明前面的内容。
⑷ 分号：分号前后是并列关系。包括结构上并列和语义上并列两种。
⑸ 破折号：两个破折号之间或一个破折号之后，是补充说明成分，可以先不看。
⑹ 引号：一种是引用别人观点，其作用要么是作为支持的观点，要么作为批判的对象；另一
种是说反话，表示反语。
⑺ 括号：括号内的内容起补充说明或解释词义的作用。
2． 长难句解析方法：先抓主干，找出复杂句最核心的成分，再层层扩展。
3． 类比关系：
⑴ 可以把类比看作特殊的例证
⑵ 识别一下，作者把什么比喻成了什么
4． 常见的长难句种的基本语法结构：
⑴ 形式主语或宾语
⑵ 强调结构
⑶ 非限定性定语从句
⑷ 同位语从句
⑸ 倒装结构
⑹ 虚拟语气
⑺ 省略
5． 虚拟语气：表达一种反事实假设。
例如：If you were/had come here yesterday, you would have seen that famous professor.
作者用虚拟语气一般表示建议、态度和观点。
四． 九大题型解题思路详解：
1． 细节事实题：
⑴ 标志：
①题干中明确提到的时间、地点、人物等细节信息
②针对文章中的一句或几句发问
③题干和选项之间是因果关系
⑵ 做题的关键在于：返回原文
①根据题干中的时间、地点、人物返回原文
②根据出题顺序返回原文（60％的准度）
③根据题干中的重点词或其同义词返回原文（如名词、动词、形容词，70％的准度）
④找原文中的难句定位，一般来说，难句都是出题点。
⑶ 迷惑人的手段：
①单词替换
②颠倒因果
③扩大范围
④常识判断
2． 例证题：
⑴ 标志：case example illustration demonstration exemplify demonstrate illustrate
⑵ 做题的关键在于：是否能找到例子支持的论点，而不在于能否看懂例子
⑶ 做题的步骤：
①首先返回原文定位该例子
②然后80％向上、20％向下搜索该例子支持的论点
③在四个选项中寻找与找到的论点表达最一致、意思最接近的一个才是正确答案
3． 词汇题：
⑴ 标志：在题干中明确指出原文中某处的单词或词组，要求辨别其意思
⑵ 做题的关键在于：该单词本身并不重要，重要的是该单词的上下文
⑶ 如果该单词认识，并不超出大纲，则其字面意思必然不是正确答案，其正确答案是根据上下文推测的一个更加深刻的含义
⑷ 做题的方法：可以使用两种方法从上下文进行推理：
①代入替换法
②在上下文中寻找同词性的词或词组
4． 句子理解题：
⑴ 标志：在题干中明确指出原文中的一句话，要求理解其意思
⑵ 做题的关键在于：返回原文对出题的句子进行语法解析，要精确理解其涵义
⑶ 做此类题目时重要的并不是上下文，而是句子本身
⑷ 正确答案与原句之间是一种同义关系，其中没有任何推理过程
5． 指代题：
⑴ 标志：在题干中明确指出原文中某处的指代词，要求辨别其指代关系。
常考的指代词有：it that one
⑵ 做题的步骤：
①首先返回原文定位该指代词，并且90％向上、10％向下搜索其指代的词、词组或句子
②然后在四个选项中找出与所找到的词、词组或句子意思最接近的一个作为答案
6． 推理题：
⑴ 标志：关键词：infer imply
⑵ 整体思路：
①绝大多数推理题是原文意思的同义表达，正确答案与原文之间没有任何推理关系
②做题时可以寻找四个选项中三错一对的关系
⑶ 如果四个选项中有两个或两个以上的选项都是成立的推理步骤，那么与原文意思最接近、所用推理最少的选项即是正确答案
7． 作者态度题：
⑴ 标志：关键词：attitude believe deem consider regard
⑵ 作者态度只分为三大类：
①支持、赞同、乐观
②客观、中立
③反对、批评、怀疑、悲观
除此之外，没有其他的作者态度
⑶ 有些选项是固定不能作为正确答案的：indifferent subjective biased puzzling
⑷ 识别作者态度有以下方法：
①找文中带有感彩的名次、动词、形容词、副词
②根据作者举的例子判断
8． 判断题：
⑴标志：
①which of the following statement is not ture/correct/mentioned
②All of the following statements are ture /correct/mentioned except
⑵ 整体思路：
①首先应判断是三错一对还是三对一错
所谓“对”是指符合原文
所谓“错”是指和原文有矛盾，或原文未提及
②每一个选项都应力争返回原文，不能通过印象进行判断
⑶ 特别关注：
①转折处
②最高级
③感彩的词（褒贬含义）
9． 主旨题：
⑴ 标志：best title main idea main problem conclusion
⑵ 整体思路：利用宏观阅读技巧做主旨题
⑶ 特别要小心首段、末段陷阱
⑷ 做题的方法：快速作文法：依据选项、快速作文、与原文核对
五． 复习策略和方法：
1． 精读真题：要求做到
标准一：真题中没有任何一个单词是生词
标准二：真题中没有任何一个长句是难句
标准三：真题中每个选项都知道其在原文中的相应出处
复习方法：⑴ 朗读和背诵
⑵ 制作三套卡片： ①单词：正面单词，背面音标及意思
②长难句：正面原句，背面翻译
③精彩表达的积累，用于写作
2． 快速重复背单词：强调背诵的“快”和“重复”
⑴ 要降低一次背诵的期望值，重复是解决遗忘的最好办法
⑵ 背单词不要利用黄金时间和整块时间
3． 定量定范围泛读
⑴ 推荐书目：《大纲》《考试分析》《英语阅读理解高分宝典》《英语考前冲刺》
⑵ 推荐刊物：①《China Daily》主要看的版面：business world economy culture opinion
②《21st Century》
③《英语世界》《英语》《经济学家(economist)》《US news and world reports》
⑶ 推荐小说：可以看看海明威的作品
⑷ 推荐语法书：①《中学生英语语法》
②《Cambridge English Grammar》
⑸ 推荐字典：①《牛津高级学习者词典》 《朗文当代英语词典》
②《韦氏大学版词典》
4． 做少量模拟题
⑴ 验证自己在真题中形成的解题思路
⑵ 扩大阅读范围
注意：一定要做错误分析！
阅读40分高分研究(很长 但大家研究一下肯定有好处)
二选一，50%概率求解的方法：
“反义项，解在其中”
“形似项，解在其中”
“近义项，解在其中”
实战出真知，技巧是从大量试题中总结出来的，要想真正掌握技巧，那就要去实战中去。请大家继续阅读本书，当您读完本书后，再重读本篇，体会一下是否对此有更深入的理解？是否有新的感觉？
十三、万无一失的答题方法
*从正面解题，抓住文章的中心思想，掌握文章的脉络结构，明查文章的细枝末节。
*从反面验证解的合理性，及命题的合理性，避开陷阱，排除隐患。
*不但要知道哪一个是解，解对在那里，而且还要知道其余三个非解选项（即干扰项）错在什么地方。
如果您能够做到以上三个方面，（注意此三者并无因定顺序，尤其是在答题遇到不顺利的情况下），那您才真正达到高手做题的那种与世无争、独孤求败的境界。这与其说是方法，不如说是境界，没有非凡的阅读能力，只能是纸上谈兵。如果您现在没有此能力，不要着急，那就请您将它看作是您今后奋斗的目标，催人奋进的动力。
第三部分 阅读之盘龙云海篇---------阅读潜在命题点的挖掘
第一节 阅读理解基本理论
三、如何在文章中做记号
善于阅读的人往往在文章的某些句子或词语下面划线，表示重要，以便以后查找方便。实践证明，这种方法在考试中是非常有效的。因为通过标出重点，你的阅读更活跃，思维更积极，注意力集中，减少大脑“走私”。文章较长(450词左右)，考生很难记住所有的内容，甚至段落大意都可能忘记，而考题只有五个，不可能所有的句子都重要，都被考到。实际上看懂大部分句子就可以了。对主要句子，如表达中心思想、段落大意的句子，应该标出并重点阅读。
1． 文章主旨句
主旨句也就是中心思想句，通常在第一段，可以是第一句，也可能是最后一句，据有人统计位于最后一句的几率高于第一句。主旨句偶尔出现在末段，有的主旨句甚至是文章中间某段中的某句。主旨句的特点是：1)是作者的观点(不是他人的观点，不是描写/说明，也不是事实)。2)该观点可能是作者提倡的，也可能是作者对他人观点的批驳。3)作者的观点只能有一个，其他的内容都起说明/论证作用。4)主旨句具有归纳性、概括性、抽象性的特点。5)常常结构复杂(命题者有意安排所致)。
例1
An invisible border divides those arguing for computers in the classroom on the behalf of students’ career prospects and those arguing for computers in the classroom for broader reasons of radical educational reform. Very few writers on the subject have explored this distinction — indeed, contradiction — which goes to the heart of what is wrong with the campaign to put computers in the classroom. (可读性：33 难度：12级)
①是说明句，交代背景“计算机走进课堂的支持者有两派，这两派之间的界限是无形的。”②是主旨句，说明主题——两派之间的这种差异说明“计算机走进课堂的运动”本质上是错误的。
例2
Few creations of big technology capture the imagination like giant dams. Perhaps it is humankind’s long suffering at the mercy of flood and drought that makes the ideal of forcing the waters to do our bidding so fascinating. But to be fascinated is also, sometimes, to be blind. Several giant dam projects threaten to do more harm than good. (可读性：58.5 难度: 8.7级)
①引出话题“巨型水坝”。②解释修水坝的原因。③转折。④是主旨句“一些巨型水坝弊大于利。”
例3
Exceptional children are different in some significant way from others of the same age. For these children to develop to their full adult potential, their education must be adapted to those differences. (可读性：45 难度：10.9级)
①引出话题“超常儿童”。②是主旨句“为了充分发展超常儿童的潜力，对他们的教育必须适应他们的特点”。
例4
Money spent on advertising is money spent as well as any I know of . It serves directly to assist a rapid distribution of goods at reasonable price, thereby establishing a firm home market and so making it possible to provide for export at competitive prices. By drawing attention to new ideas it helps enormously to raise standards of living. By helping to increase demand it ensures an increased need for labour, and is therefore an effective way to fight unemployment. It lowers the costs of many services: without advertisements your daily newspaper would cost four times as much, the price of your television licence would need to be doubled, and travel by bus or tube would cost 20 per cent more.
And perhaps most important of all, advertising provides a guarantee of reasonable value in the products and services you buy. Apart from the fact that twenty-seven acts of Parliament govern the terms of advertising, no regular advertiser dare promote a product that fails to live up to the promise of his advertisements. He might fool some people for a little while through misleading advertising. He will not do so for long, for mercifully the public has the good sense not to buy the inferior article more than once. If you see an srticle consistently advertised, it is the surest proof I know that the article does what is claimed for it claimed for it ,and that it represents good value.
Advertising does more for the material benefit of the community than any other force I can think of.
There is one more point feel I ought to touch on. Recently I heard a well-known television personality declare that he was against advertising because it persuades rather than informs. He was drawing excessively fine distinctions. Of course advertising seeks to persuade.
If its message were confined merely to information — and that in itself would be difficult if not impossible to achieve, for even a detail such as the choice of the colour of a shirt is subtly persuasive — advertising would be so boring that no one would pay any attention. But perhaps that is what the well-known television personality wants.(360 words 可读性：49.8 难度：11.5级)
文章话题是广告。这篇文章主旨句显然不在第一段，而是在第三段。该段是前两段的内容的总结：广告是带来前所未有的物质上的好处的力量。后两段(4、5段)话题为与他人争辩广告的劝说作用，认为广告就是要劝另人购买。
2． 段落主题句(TOPIC SENTENCE)
除了标出篇章的主旨句外，标出各段的主题句同样重要。每一段都有一个段的中心句，也有人叫它段落大意句、段中心思想句等等。主题句是考试重点，很多题目都是围绕着段中心设计的。确定主题句不仅有利于确定文章主旨，还有利读懂细节题，因此主题句的确定是阅读的关键。
主题句的特点：1)通常是第一句话，偶尔是最后一句，段中少见。2)是观点(不是描写/说明、不是事实)。可能是作者的观点，也可能是他人的观点。3)该观点可能是作者提倡的，也可能是作者认为其他人的观点是错误的/偏激的等等。4)作者的观点只能有一个。主题句只能有一个，其他的内容都起说明/论证作用。5)具有归纳性、概括性、抽象性等特点。
例1
And yet, the myth of controlling the waters persists. This week, in the heart of civilized Europe, Slovaks and Hungarians stopped just short of sending in the troops in their contention over a dam on the Danube. The huge complex will probably have all the usual problems of big dams. But Slovakia is bidding for independence from the Czechs, and now needs a dam to prove itself. (可读性：68.6 难度：7.8级)
Q：What is the myth concerning giant dams
[A] They bring in more fertile soil.
They help defend the country.
[C] They strengthen international ties.
[D] They have universal control of the waters.
解析：主题句为①“控制该河段水域的神话依然继续着。”下面的句子是两个个体例子说明主题句。所以[D]“他们有对河流水域的完全控制权”正确。
例2
You can begin to think of yourself as truly intelligent on the basis of how you choose to feel in the face of trying circumstances. The life struggles are pretty much the same for each of us. Everyone who is involved with other human beings in any social context has similar difficulties. Disagreements, conflicts and compromises are a part of what it means to be human. Similarly, money, growing old ,sickness, deaths, natural disasters and accidents are all events which present problems to virtually all human beings. But some people are able to make it , to avoid immobilizing depression and unhappiness despite such occurrences, while others collapse or have an N.B.D. Those who recognize problems as a human condition and don’t measure happiness by an absence of problems are the most intelligent kind of humans we know; also,the most rare. (可读性：51.4 难度：11.1级)
1. In the paragraph, the author tells us that
[A] difficulties are part of everyone’s life.
depression and unhappiness are unavoidable in life.
[C] everybody should learn to avoid trying circumstances.
[D] good feelings can contribute to eventual academic excellence.
2. According to the passage, what kind of people are rare
[A] Those who don’t emphasize bookish excellence in their pursuit of happiness.
Those who are aware of difficulties in life but know how to avoid unhappiness.
[C] Those who measure happiness by an absence of problems but seldom suffer from N.B.D.’S.
[D] Those who are able to secure happiness though having to struggle against trying circumstances.
分析：①为主题句“知道如何面对逆境才是真正的聪明人。”②~⑦支持主题句：②③④⑤说“对于所有人来说困难和矛盾是人生的不可避免的一部分”。⑥但有些人成功地避免了不幸，而有些人却精神崩溃。⑦重申主题句。“那些认识到困难是人生必然存在的事物，不以有无困难来衡量愉快与否，是最聪明的人，也是很罕见的人。”答案：1.[A] 2.
3． 题干与选项中的关键词
仔细读考题，从考题中找出关键词，目的是确定考的是什么，考文章中的哪一段、哪一句。常见的关键词包括题干中重要的普通名词或专有名词，形容词、副词的最高级，四个选项中相同、相近词或者相关内容。在这些关键词的指引下寻找对应的句子或段落。有的时候关键词可以是各种词类，非常隐蔽，需要非常细心才能找到。
例1
“I have great confidence that by the end of the decade we’ll know in vast detail how cancer cells arise,” says microbiologist Robert Weinberg, an expert on cancer. “But ,” he cautions, “some people have the idea that once one understands the causes, the cure will rapidly follow. Consider Pasteur. He discovered the causes of many kinds of infections, but it was fifty or sixty years before cures were available.”(可读性：57.3 难度：9.6)
Q: The example of Pasteur in the passage is used to
[A] predict that the secret of cancer will be disclosed in a decade.
indicate that the prospects for curing cancer are bright.
[C] prove that cancer will be cured in fifty to sixty years.
[D] warn that there is still a long way to go before cancer can be conquered.(实考试题)
解析：Pasteur是关键词，在文章中先找到Pasteur很容易，这样就确定了所考的段落。由于篇幅所限，本文没有引证所有的段落(请参看1994年全国统考试题Passage4)。纵读全文，大家会进一步体会到这种方法的好处的。正确理解提到Pasteur的相关句子便可知道：治愈癌症还要等很多年。所以答案是[D]。
例2
Cars account for half the oil consumed in the U.S., about half the urban pollution and one fourth the greenhouse gases. They take a similar toll of resources in other industrial nations and in the cities of the developing world. As vehicle use continues to increase in the coming decade, the U.S. and other countries will have to deal with these issues or else face unacceptable economic, health-related and political costs. It is unlikely that oil prices will remain at their current low level or that other nations will accept a large and growing U.S. contribution to global climatic change. (可读性：47.47 难度：12级)
Q：From the passage we know that the increased use of cars will
[A] consume half of the oil produced in the world.
have serious consequences for the well-being of all nations.
[C] widen the gap between the developed and developing countries.
[D] impose an intolerable economic burden on residents of large cities.
解析：关键词是increased use of cars, 并且和③中vehicle use continues to increase相呼应，确定考点在此句。③“美国和其他国家将不得不做出选择，或者处理这些问题，或者面临不堪设想的经济、健康以及政治后果。”可见答案为。
四、正确选项和错误选项的特点
在本书中，正确的选项称为解，错误的选项称为干扰项。了解这两种选项的特点就是要了解命题者的思路。命题者都是英语水平相当高的英语专家，专门研究过英语测试理论，有丰富的命题经验，对中国考生的英语水平和特点有非常深的了解。这些特点，是外国专家所难以具备的。
出题者命题碰到的第一个问题是选材。文章的来源决不可能是学生学过的教材，或者市场上出售的教辅和模拟题。他们要从考生不易得到的、不熟悉的、不经常读的材料中选择。这些材料包括英语国家的报刊杂志，以及众多的普通读物。命题要考虑到文章要有一定的难度，对于话题考生不能太陌生，当然太熟悉也不行。文章要有一定的完整性，即使是从一篇长文章摘下来的一部分，其本身也要相对独立，要有中心思想等。然后就是确定题眼(考点)，一篇文章只考5道题，不可能所有内容都考，这就要确定考什么。总的原则是文章哪里难就考哪。特别是中国学生不易理解之处就可能成为考点。常考的包括长难句的理解、逻辑推测能力以及段落或文章的中心思想等。考点确定之后，就是写解和设置干扰项。两者的特点如下：
1． 正确选项的特点
设置正确选项(解)的一个常用方法就是同义替换或释义(paraphrase)，即把文中语言改头换面，运用与原文不同的结构、不同的词汇，来表达相同或类似的意思。常见的形式有：
1)正确选项大量使用原文的同义词或同义结构
例1
Useful as half-sleeping might be, it’s only been found in birds and such water mammals as dolphins, whales, and seals. Perhaps keeping one side of the brain awake allows a sleeping animal to surface occasionally to avoid drowning. (可读性：56.8 难度：10.1)
Q：While sleeping, some water mammals tend to keep half awake in order to
[A] alert themselves to the approaching enemy.
emerge from water now and then to breathe.
[C] be sensitive to the ever-changing environment.
[D] avoid being swept away by rapid currents.(实考试题)
解析：解是②的改写，原文和答案词汇比较如下：
答案中的词汇实际上是文中词汇的英语释义。答案是。
例2
We live in a society in which the medicinal and social use of substances (drugs) is pervasive: an aspirin to quiet a headache, some wine to be sociable, coffee to get going in the morning, a cigarette for the nerves. When do these socially acceptable and apparently constructive uses of a substance become misuses First of all, most substances taken in excess will produce negative effects such as poisoning or intense perceptual distortions. Repeated use of a substance can also lead to physical addiction or substance dependence. Dependence is marked first by an increased tolerance, with more and more of the substance required to produce the desired effect, and then by the appearance of unpleasant withdrawal symptoms when the substance is discontinued. (可读性：42.4 难度：12级)
Q：Physical dependence on certain substances results from
[A] uncontrolled consumption of them over long periods of time.
exclusive use of them for social purposes.
[C] quantitative application of them to the treatment of diseases.
[D] careless employment of them for unpleasant symptoms.(实考试题)
解析：解是④的改写，原文和答案词汇与结构比较如下：
解中词汇比文中词汇难而且长。答案是[A]。
例3
There is, as Robert Rubin, the treasury secretary, says, a “disjunction” between the mass of business anecdote that points to a leap in productivity and the picture reflected by the statistics. (可读性：37.8 难度：12级)
Q：The official statistics on productivity growth
[A] exclude the usual rebound in a business cycle.
fall short of businessmen’s anticipation.
[C] meet the expectation of business people.
[D] fail to reflect the true of economy.
解析：原文和答案词汇与结构比较如下：
答案词汇比文中词汇简单，主要考查对原文词汇是否真正理解了。答案是。
2)正确选项频繁使用原文的反义词加上反义结构来表达与原文相同的意思，如：
He is old. He is no longer young. 句子结构一个是肯定形式，一个是否定形式，考查考生对这两种结构的理解。
例
Experts suggest that speech stages are reached in a fixed sequence and at a constant age, but there are cases where speech has started late in a child who eventually turns out to be of high IQ. At twelve weeks a baby smiles and makes vowel-like sounds; at twelve months he con speak simple words and understand simple commands; at eighteen months he has a vocabulary of three to fifty words. At three he knows about 1,000 words which he can put into sentences, and at four his language differs from that of his parents in style rather than grammar. (可读性：73.2 难度：8.0级)
Q：If a child starts to speak later than others, he will
[A] have a high IQ.
be less intelligent.
[C] be insensitive to verbal signals.
[D] not necessarily be backward.(实考试题)
解析：解是①后半句双重否定的改写，原文和答案词汇比较如下：
答案是[D]
3)正确选项是原文的总体或局部
总体和局部(或称一般和特殊)的关系主要表现为：一般是特殊的总和，特殊为一般的属性。这种题型考查类比推理能力。
例
There are two basic ways to see growth: one as a product, the other as a process. People have generally viewed personal growth as an external result or product that can easily be identified and measured. The worker who gets a promotion, the student whose grades improve, the foreigner who learns a new language — all these are examples of people who have measurable results to show for their efforts. (可读性：51.9 难度：11.6级)
Q: A person is generally believed to achieve personal growth when
[A] he has given up his smoking habit.
he has made great efforts in his work.
[C] he is keen on learning anything new.
[D] he has tried to determine where he is on his journey. (实考试题)
解析：题干中generally是关键词，与②中generally相对。②：“人们通常认为个人的成长是外在的成果或产物，是容易辨别和衡量的”，正确答案必须符合“外在”、“易辨别和衡量”这两个一般特征。[A]“当一个人戒了烟”，烟戒了是一种易辨别的、外在的“成果”，与“升职”等相似，属于特殊的情况。故[A]正确。
4)正确选项常常是原文长难句的简单化解释
难句是所有考试必考的内容。难句之所以难有三方面的原因：A)句子结构复杂；表达抽象；C)词难。所以很多题目都围绕着难句做文章，通常使用简单的结构或词汇对难句做浅显、具体的解释。
例1
Whether the eyes are “the windows of the soul” is debatable, that they are intensely important in interpersonal communication is a fact. During the first two months of a baby’s life, the stimulus that produces a smile. Significantly, a real human face with eyes covered will not motivate a smile, nor will the sight of only one eye when the face is presented in profile. This attraction to eyes as opposed to the nose or mouth continues as the baby matures. In one study, when American four-year-olds were asked to draw people, 75 percent of them drew people with eyes. In Japan, however, where babies are carried on their mother’s back, infants do not acquire as much attachment to eyes as they do in other cultures. As a result, Japanese adults make little use of the face either to encode or decode meaning. In fact, Argyle reveals that the “proper place to focus one‘s gaze during a conversation in Japan is on the neck of one’s conversation partner.” (可读性：58.1 难度：10.6级)
Q: Babies will not be stimulated to smile by a person
[A] whose front view is fully perceived.
whose face is covered with a mask.
[C] whose face is seen from the side.
[D] whose face is free of any covering.
解析：本题考查对④的理解。特别是presented in profile。profile这里的词义是“侧面像”，所以[C]whose face is seen from the side“从侧面看去”正确。
例2
But my own worry today is less that of the overwhelming problem of elemental literacy than it is of the slightly more luxurious problem of the decline in the skill even of the middle-class reader, of his unwillingness to afford those spaces of silence, those luxuries of domesticity and time and concentration, that surround the image of the classic act of reading. It has been suggested that almost 80 percent of America’s literate, educated teenagers can no longer read without an accompanying noise (music) in the background or a television screen flickering at the corner of their field of perception. We know very little about the brain and how it deals with simultaneous conflicting input, but every commonsense intuition suggests we should be profoundly alarmed. This violation of concentration, silence, solitude goes to the very heart of our notion of literacy; this new form of part-reading, of part-reading, of part-perception against background distraction, renders impossible certain essential acts of apprehension and concentration, let alone that most important tribute any human being can pay to poem or a piece of prose he or she really loves, which is to learn it by heart. Not by brain, by heart; the expression is vital. (可读性：35.7 难度：12级)
1.The author’s biggest concern is
[A] elementary school children’s disinterest in reading classics.
the surprisingly low rate of literacy in the U.S.
[C] the musical setting American readers require for reading.
[D] the reading ability and reading behavior of the middle class.
2.A major problem with most adolescents who can read is
[A] their fondness of music and TV programs.
their ignorance of various forms of art and literature.
[C] their lack of attentiveness and basic understanding.
[D] their inability to focus on conflicting input.
解析：
1.本题考查对①的理解。该句长达62个词。全句主干结构为my worry…is less that of…than…“与其说……不如说……”。作者说“我虽然担心初级读者在读写方面存在的问题，但我更担心的是中等阶层读者阅读技能的问题”。接着作者描述了问题所在，从of his unwillingness开始，作者说“他们不能在安静的环境下读书，不能专心……”。所以[D]“中等阶层的阅读能力和阅读行为”是整句的概括。
2.本题考查对倒数第二句的理解，该句长达66个词，有两个分句，用分号隔开。第一个分句大意为：这种阅读时不专心、不安静、不独处的情况是读写最大的问题。go to the heart of 是固定短语，意为“（问题）最重要的方面”。第二个分句更复杂，难点为作者把render sth. +adj.(使什么怎么样)句型倒装，形容词提前，名词退后，因为名词部分较长。难词有apprehension“理解”，pay tribute to “崇敬”。大意为：这种伴随着背景音乐边读边理解的阅读方式是不可能做到真正理解和专心致志的，更不用说我们欣赏诗歌时还需要的崇敬之情了。所以[C]“他们不专心，缺乏基本的理解”是两个分句的综合，是答案。
5）正确选项是对原文引语的解释
文章的引语通常较难，因为作者之所以引述他人的话是因为自己的话无论怎么说都没有他人说得准确、说得好。引语的目的不是夸耀他人，而是用来论证说明自己的观点。引语是经常考查的内容，题干形式有两种：The author quotes…because…;the author quotes…to illustrate…
例
“Creative thinking may mean simply the realization that’s no particular virtue in doing things the way they have always been done,”wrote Rudolph Flesch, a language authority, this accounts for our reaction to seemingly simple innovations like plastic garbage bags and suitcases on wheels that make life more convenient:“How come nobody thought of that before ”
The creative approach begins with the proposition that nothing is as it appears. Innovators will not accept that there is only one way to do anything. Faced with getting from A to B, the average person will automatically set out on the best-known and apparently simplest route. The innovator will search for alternate courses, which may prove easier in the long run and are bound to be more interesting and challenging even if they lead to dead ends.(可读性：473 难度：12级)
Q：The author quotes Rudolph Flesch in paragraph 1 because
[A] Rudolph Flesch is best-known expert in the study of human creativity.
the quotation strengthens the assertion that creative individuals look for new ways of doing things.
[C] the reader is familiar with Rudolph Flesch’s point of view.
[D] the quotation adds a new idea to the information previously presented.(实考试题)
解析：这句引语含义：“创造性的思维也许仅仅意味着认识到按常规做事并没有什么不寻常的素质”，下一段的前两句说“创造性思维起始于这样一个命题：一切东西都不是它表现出来的那样。革新家们认为做任何事都不是只有一种方法。”将这两点综合考虑可知，作者引用Rudolph只不过是为了进一步证明自己的观点，即创新者总是寻找做事的新方法，这与完全一致。
正确选项的下面的几个特点是英语的重点和难点。这些特点总的特征是答案具有高度概括性、归纳性、总结性、抽象性和推理性。这或许就是英语为什么比六级难的原因。
6）正确选项是文中例证或事实的归纳总结
例1
Given all these disadvantages, central bankers seem to have had much to boast about of late. Average inflation in the big seven industrial economies fell to a mere 2.3% last year, close to its lowest level in 30 years, before rising slightly to 2.5% this July. This is a long way below the double-digit rates which many countries experienced in the 1970s and early 1980s.
It is also less than most forecasters had predicated. In late 1994 the panel of economists which The Economist polls each month said that America’s inflation rate would average 3.5% in 1995. In fact, it fell to 2.6% in August, and expected to average only about 3% for the years as a whole. In Britain and Japan inflation is running half a Percentage point below the rate predicted at the end of last year. This is no flash in the pan; over the past couple of years, inflation has been consistently lower than expected in Britain and America.(可读性：49 难度：10.9级)
Q：From the passage we learn that
[A] there is a definite relationship between inflation and interest rates.
economy will always follow certain models.
[C] the economic situation is better than expected.
[D] economists had foreseen the present economic situation.(实考试题)
解析：综合推断题。这两段并不难，有大量数据，问题考查从这些数据可以归纳出什么。第二句说通货膨胀率降到了2.3%;第三句：这（低膨胀率）比多数经济学家预测的还要低，综合这一切可以推断：经济形势比预计的要好。故[C]正确。
例2
One hundred and thirteen million Americans have at least one bank-issued credit card. They give their owners automatic credit in stores, restaurants, and hotels, at home, across the country, and even abroad, and they make many banking services available as well. More and more of these credit cards can be read automatically, making it possible to withdraw or deposit money in scattered locations, whether of not the local branch bank is open. For many of us the “cashless society”is not on the horizon-it’s already here.（可读性：45.3 难度：12级）
Q：According to the passage, the credit card enables its owner to
[A] withdraw as much money from the bank as he wishes.
obtain more convenient services than other people do.
[C] enjoy greater trust from the storekeeper.
[D] cash money wherever he wishes to.(实考试题)
解析：对②、③概括，信用卡使持卡者比其他人享有更多的便利服务，可知正确。[A]、[D]两项均过于绝对，且与文意不符；[C]“持卡者得到店主更大的信任”文中未提及，也应排除。
例3
For a long period of time and in many parts of the country,a traveler was a welcome break in an otherwise dull existence. Dullness and loneliness were common problems of the families who generally lived distant from one another. strangers and travelers were welcome sources of diversion, and brought news of the outside world.(可读性：54.2 难度：10.2级)
Q：Families in frontier settlements used to entertain strangers
[A]to improve their hard life.
in view of their long-distance travel.
[C]to add some flavor to their own daily life.
[D]out of a charitable impulse.(实考试题)
解析：大意为：过去很长一段时间，在美国很多地方，旅行者的到来对居民们单调生活是一种可喜的调节。无聊、孤独对相距很远的家庭来说是普遍存在的问题。陌生人和旅行者给他们的生活带来了娱乐消遣，因而受欢迎；同时还带来了外面世界的信息。可见，边远地区的人们对陌生人（游客）如此热情是因为这给他们的生活增添了乐趣，所以[C]正确。[A]“为了改善他们的艰苦生活”言过其实；“于由游客漫长的旅途”不够确切。
7）正确选项是对段落中心/大意，或者篇章中心的归纳总结
例1
Few people doubt the fundamental importance of mothers in child rearing, but what do fathers do Much of what they contribute is simply the result of being a second adult in the home. Bringing up children is demanding, stressful and exhausting. Two adults can support and make up for each other’s strengths.(可读性：65.7 难度：7.7级)
Q：The paragraph points out that one of the advantages of a family with both parents is
[A] husband and wife can share house work.
two adults are always better than one.
[C] the fundamental importance of mothers can be fully recognized.
[D] husband and wife can compensate for each other’s shortcoming.
解析：本段的话题是子女抚养中母亲或父亲的作用，如果双方互相支持，可以弥补对方的缺陷。可见[D]“夫妇可互相补偿彼此缺点”是段落中心的概括，符合题意。[A]“夫妇可共同做家务劳动”和 “两个总比一个好”都是根据生活常识编造的选项（合理项，参见本书“错误选项的特征”一节）；[C]“母亲的重要性可以得到充分认可”，表达片面。
例2
Levin would not comment on the debate last week, but there were signs that the chairman was backing off his hard line-stand, at leas to some extent. During the discussion of rock singing verses at last month’s stockholders’ meeting, Levin asserted that “music is not the cause of society’s ills” and even cited his son, a teacher in the Bronx, New York, who uses rap to communicate with students. But he talked as well about the “balanced struggle” between creative freedom and social responsibility, and he announced that the company would launch a drive to develop standards for distribution and labeling of potentially objectionable music. (可读性：39.2 难度：12级)
Q: In face of the recent attacks on the company, the chairman
[A] stuck to a strong stand to defend freedom of expression.
softened his tone and adopted some new policy.
[C] changed his attitude and yielded to objection.
[D] received more support from the 15-member board.
解析：①由于上周发生的争执，Levin可能放弃强硬立场。③Levin宣布，公司将尽力对可能招致人们反对的音乐制定各种发行和标识的标准。综合这两镍可推断“Levin缓和了语气并采取一些新政策”正确。[A]正反倒置，错误；[C]说的程度太过了，Levin还不至于会改变态度，屈服于对方；[D]论据不足。
8)正确选项是原文某段文字的推理
例
Kitcher is a philosopher, and this may account, in part, for the clarity and effectiveness of his arguments. The non-specialist will be able to obtain at least a notion of the sorts of data and argument that support evolutionary theory. The final chapter in the creationists will be extremely clear to all. On the dust jacket of this fine book, Stephen Jay Gould says: “This book stands for reason itself.” And so it does — and all would be well were reason the only judge in the creationism/ evolution debate. (可读性：57.2 难度：9.6级)
Q: From the passage we can infer that
[A] reasoning has played a decisive role in the debate.
creationists do not base their argument on reasoning.
[C] evolutionary theory is too difficult for non-specialists.
[D] creationism is supported by scientific findings.
解析：本段意思是：金切尔是位哲学家，这也许能部分说明他的立论所以明确而有说服力。非专业人士起码可以了解支持进化论的各种数据和观点。关于神造论者的最后一章对每个人来说都阐述得极为清楚。这部优秀作品的护封上引用了斯蒂芬.杰.古尔德的一句话，“本书代表的是理性”。的确——如果理性是神造论和进化论之争的惟一裁判，一切问题就已解决了。最后一句是个带有倒装结构的虚拟语气句子，转换成正常语序是：If reason were the only judge in the creationism/evolution debate, all would be well. 推断神造论是非理性的，故正确。
2． 干扰项的特点
错误选项，也叫干扰项，也戏称陷阱，是出题者(中国出题专家)的拿手好戏。对错选项的分析从某种角度来说比正确选项更有意义。因为在实际做题时，考生做的大部分工作是排除三个错误选项。有时问题集中在两个选项上，考生明明知道答案就在这两个选项中，可是很难判断究竟哪个是错的。
总的来说，干扰项从语言和内容两方面欺骗考生。虽然花样很多，但总是有些规律可循的。出题者在编错误选项时，就像一个大骗子，试想骗子的伎俩有哪些呢？首先是把假的说成真的，所谓以假乱真，其次是真真假假，虚虚实实，所谓掉包，再次是夸大其词，或以偏概全，一会儿把苹果说成灵丹妙药，一会儿又说灵丹妙药根本不存在。对干扰项的对策有以下7种：
1． 合理项：文章中没提到，利用生活常识编造出来的选项同。对策：做题不可凭空想象，一切都要从文中找依据。在相当多的情况下“项不是解”。
2． 断章取义：使用文章中出现的词语或类似的结构仿造。对策：原词越多，对的可能性越小。
3． 小动作：错误选项和原文句子几乎一样，但在细微之处做了手脚，改动了几个小词，使得意思和原文不相符。对策：仔细，仔细，再仔细！不仅要看大意，更要看细节。
4． 以偏概全：就是用文章中的细节片面的、次要的观点回答问题。对策：时刻要有一种博大的胸襟。
5． 张冠李戴(把一个事物的特征说成是另一个事物的特征，把他人的观点说成是作者的观点)、正反倒置(把作者观点的反面说成是作者的观点)、因果倒置(把因说成果，把果说成因)。对策：头脑清楚。
6． 过度引申：测试推理能力是很正常的，但有相当多的选项，过度推理，超出文章的范围。对策：掌握好分寸。
7． 字面意思：被测试的单词或短语，实际(深层)含义和表面上个别词汇的意思不同。出题者经常用表面意思作为干扰项。对策：字面意思不是解。
例
Aimlessness has hardly been typical of the postwar Japan whose productivity and social harmony are the envy of the United States and Europe. But increasingly the Japanese are seeing a decline of the traditional work-moral values. Ten years ago young people were hardworking and saw their jobs as their primary reason for being, but now Japan has largely fulfilled its economic needs, and young people don’t know where they should go next.
The coming of age of the postwar baby boom and an entry of women into the male-dominated job market have limited the opportunities of teen-agers who are already questioning the heavy personal sacrifices involved in climbing Japan’s rigid social ladder to good schools and jobs. In a recent survey, it was found that only 24.5 percent of Japanese students were fully satisfied with school life, compared with their jobs than did their counterparts in the 10 other countries surveyed.
While often praised by foreigners for its emphasis on the basics, Japanese education tends to stress test taking and mechanical learning over creativity and self-expression. “Those things that do not show up in the test scores — personality, ability, courage or humanity — are completely ignored,” says Toshiki Kaifu, chairman of the ruling Liberal Democratic Party’s education committee. “Frustration against this kind of thing leads kids to drop out and run wild.” Last year Japan experienced 2,125 incidents of school violence, including 929 assaults on teachers. Amid the outcry, many conservative leaders are seeking a return to the prewar emphasis on moral education. Last year Mitsuo Setoyams, who was then education minister, raised eyebrows when he argued that liberal reforms introduced by the American occupation authorities after World War Ⅱ had weakened the “Japanese morality of respect for parents.”
But that may have more to do with Japanese life-styles. “In Japan,” says educator Yoko Muro, “it’s never a question of whether you enjoy your job and your life, but only how much you can endure.” With economic growth has come centralization; fully 76 percent of Japan’s 119 million citizens live in cities where community and the extended family have been abandoned in favor of isolated, two generation households. Urban Japanese have long endured lengthy commutes (travels to and from work) and crowded living conditions, but as the old group and family values weaken, the discomfort is beginning to tell. In the past decade, the Japanese divorce rate, while still well below that of the United States, has increased by more than 50 percent, and suicides have increased by nearly one-quarter. (可读性：34.9 难度：12级)
1． In the Westerner’s eyes, the postwar Japan was
[A] under aimless development. a positive example.
[C] a rival to the West. [D] on the decline.
2. According to the author, what may chiefly be responsible for the moral decline of Japanese society
[A] Women’s participation in social activities is limited.
More workers are dissatisfied with their jobs.
[C] Excessive emphasis has been placed on the basics.
[D] The life-style has been influenced by Western values.
3. Which of the following is true according to the author
[A] Japanese education is praised for helping the young climb the social ladder.
Japanese education is characterized by mechanical learning as well as creativity.
[C] More stress should be placed on the cultivation of creativity.
[D] Dropping out leads to frustration against test taking.
解析：
1． <1 >①“缺乏目标从来就不是战后日本的典型特征，日本国的生产率和社会的和谐令欧美人羡慕”，可见战后日本是一个正面榜样，故正确。[A]小动作：把 <1 >①关键词保留下来，但hardly去掉了，结果意思大相径庭，原文的否定变成了肯定；[C]字面意思：envy(羡慕，嫉妒)的字面意思；[D]断章取义：使用②中“decline”编造。
2． 题干关键词为chiefly 和be responsible for。 <3 >末句：日本教育大臣说过，二战后占领日本的美国当局进行自由化改革削弱了日本人尊敬父母的道德观。 <4 >①：但是，这(道德)也计与日本人的生活方式关系更大。将两句联在一起看，作者认为日本社会道德下降的主要原因是[D]“生活方式受了西方价值观的影响”，故[D]正确。[A]正反倒置。 <2 >①提到女性进入男性占主导地位的人才市场，和[A]正好相反，而且[A]也是符合生活常识的合理项。以偏概全。借用了 <2 >末句的完整意思，但是该句不是观点，而是一次调查结果，是具体的事实，并非全部。[C]以偏概全。 <3 >①：由于重视基础知识，所以忽视了其他方面的教育。 <4 >①：但是，这(道德下降)也许与日本人的生活方式关系更大。所以[C]是次要原因。
3． <3 >①：“尽管由于强调基础教育而受到外国人的赞赏，但是日本教育往往强调应试和机械性学习而忽视创造性及自我表现”，作者暗示日本教育更应该强调创造能力的培养，所以[C]正确。[A]断章取义。将 <2 >①中“climbing…social ladder”和 <3 >①中“often praised by foreigners for”拼在一起唬人。小动作。将 <3 >①中over改成as well as。失之毫厘，谬以千里。[D]因果倒置。 <3 >③：考试失败导致学生辍学。[D]颠倒了因果关系。
阅读最后冲刺阅读突破——技巧与总结
四大问题
1．已经找对了题干与原文对应处，为何还做错？原因：
①精确定位：要看清真正的问题，即用信息词定位之后，要看清句子逻辑关系，弄清意思。如02年60题
②学会看选项的方法：
a 找最贴近原文意思的选项 b 去除选项间的相同信息，专门关注区别点 c 分清褒贬 d 分清程度大小，强烈关注选项中表内容的单词。如同为贬义，则一般挑那个程度小的选项 e 看清范围，分清是整体还是局部
特别关注：在动词意义相近的情况下，千万关注其涉及的名词！！因为选项中的名词一般都与原文中的名词一样，很难做替换
③如何判断选项：
a 在遇到两个意思很相近的选项时：特别是假设A选项正确，还能推出B选项也正确的时候，究竟选哪个？要选B选项！！因为通常B选项的范围包括了A，即B大于A，所以B正确。
原文、问题、选项三者相比较，重要性最高的是问题！！！其次是选项！！最后是原文！
b 只挑最好的：对应的好于不知道的，不知道的好于不对应的
所谓“不对应的”是指：能明确确定该选项与题目要求不符
所谓“不知道的”是指：在实战中以自身水平无法明确判断该选项的意思是否在原文出现过以及能否对应于题目
考场心态：必要性思维——正确选项未必能充分完整地表达原文意思，而只要沾边即可。反之，不沾边的必错！
c 根据内容沾边客观地决定最佳选项，因此最佳选项是通过在四个选项中比较得出的，而非直接凭自己对原文的推断得出，注意不要推！
2．根本没找到对应处，为什么？
①原文没明说 ②与原文表达并不完全一样
看问题时，抓什么？
① 如果是细节定位的题目，则强调局部性，“不是找不到，而是要找与问题沾边的”
② 如果所问的信息点在原文中布满全篇，则此点不关注，并且对任何一篇文章都可以提问的问题部分，通通不关注，而且不必关注动词，只看题干中剩下的部分，一般会是个核心名词，这时用这个核心名词定位原文，再找与这个核心名词沾边的选项，通过意思上的一致性比较后得出答案。如01年61题 、00年64题
注意：
问题的作用仅仅在于提醒我们该用什么信息做题！
原文的作用仅在于客观地复制到脑中，以为选择选项的依据，不要有任何主观加工推理！据此可以先排除明显不对的选项，对于剩下的选项只挑最佳的，而不是挑最正确的！所以，我们的结论是：原文看不懂，照样解对题目！！唯独对于词汇题，这种方法可能失灵，因为在一句话任何单词都不认识的情况下无从选择，这时一般来讲，选A的概率较大。
选项的作用在于要求我们对排除了明显不沾边的选项后，对剩下的选项要反复比较，不可轻易否定，在实战中，要求要快速分辨出选项的差异点。
3．对于根本没办法找对应信息点的题目，怎么办？
比如：题干是：原文告诉我们什么？ 作者同意什么？ 文章的主题？ 作者的态度？
其实我们读文章时，最基本的要弄明白：①该文章在说谁？（围绕谁说）②是好是坏还是中立？
文章中最重要的部分有4个部分：段首句，段尾句，转折处，文章末尾！注意：这4个部分任一部分但凡伴随着具体事务、具体信息的，立刻成为非重点。比如02年54题55题 01年67题 00年58题
4．对于直接问下面哪项是正确的，怎么办？
这种题目无技巧可言，只好返回原文，重叠选项！
5．对于两个极其相似的选项，如何判断？
① 必须精确定位！对于两个选项犹疑不定，很可能是由于原文读的信息多了，因此实际上有一个根本不沾边
② 关键要先分清两个选项的区别到底在何处，然后再对比原文选择！
③ 对于考察整体性的题目，不是根据选项中个别单词与原文一致而选择，而是要注重选项的整体意义
如03年43题C和D 48题ABD
最后的话：
当被选项搞的犯晕时，千万别自乱阵脚，千万记住任何答案要从原文中找，不可主观臆断！！！
另外千万看清是到底是在问什么、要我们找什么，以利于精确定位，注意选项对比的“好坏”和“范围”原则！！！
一.阅读理解命题干扰项的特点:
1.看似合理,实则以偏概全,断章取义.
惯用手法:利用生活常识编造选项,把文中事实细节当主旨
应对方法:从文中找依据,找答案,"合理项"不一定就是正确选项
2.偷梁换柱,张冠李戴.
惯用手法:对原句细微处做改动,截取原文词语或结构进行改造,因果倒置,
把A的观点说成B的观点.
应对方法:过于相似的选项不一定正确,"原词越多,对的可能性越小".
3.用常规含义代替偏用词义.
惯用手法:用常规词义麻痹考生.
应对方法:掌握熟词生义,并根据上下文推测其在特定语境下的含义
4.过度引申.
惯用手法:备选项虽是由文章推出,但是却超出文章范围
应对方法:切勿过度发挥,一切以原文为本.
二.各类题型的特点及解答技巧
(一)主旨题
1.文章主旨给出的四种形式:文首,文中,文尾,没有明确主旨,需总结.
2.主旨题的解题技巧
*不管它出现在文章的什么位置,都作为最后一道题去做,因为做完其他题以后会对主旨的理解有帮助
*着重理解首末段,首末句
*主旨在文章中间的情况(非文首文尾),遇到文章前后段意思转折,提高警惕
3.主旨题的注意事项:
*段落中出现转折时,该句很可能是主题句
*作者有意识的反复重复的观点通常是主旨
*首段出现疑问句时,对该问题的解答就是文章主旨
*提出文章主旨时常伴有的文字提示:therefore,thus,but,however,in short等等
4.选项特点:
正确选项特点:不出现细节信息;不含过分肯定或绝对意义的词
干扰项特点:细节信息明显;过于笼统
(二)作者观点和态度题
1.作者态度题的解题技巧
*作者对某一事物的看法,要么支持,要么反对,带中立色彩的词最不可能是正确答案
*漠不关心类词语一定不对,既然写文章就不会不关心
*不要把自己的态度揉入其中,也要区分开作者的态度和作者引用的别人的态度
*当作者的态度没有明确提出时,要学会根据作者使用词语的褒贬性去判断作者的态度
*作者观点一般与文章主旨相关联
[注]新趋势:
*不仅局限于作者的态度,而发展到问文中某人对某事物的态度
*选项可能不再是态度明确的肯定或否定的词语,而改为带有程度限制的词
*一般带有绝对化或过于强烈的表示必错,如:strong,complete,entire,enthusiastic等
*持有保留态度的比较客观,常常是正确选项,如:reserved,qualified,tempered,guarded,consent等
(三)词义/句义题
1.对词义考察的两种方式:超纲词义含义推断;熟词生义或是在特定场合的意思
2.词义题的解题技巧:
*根据上下文进行推理猜测,两个原则
<1>不管这个词多超纲,根据上下文都能得出其意思
<2>不管这个词多熟悉,都要通过上下文得出其在特定场合的意思
*正确选项不是熟词的常规含义
3.猜测词义的方法:
*构词法:根据词根,词缀判断词义
*词性加搭配:先判断生词在文章中的词性,再看它与哪些词语可以搭配,最后根据自己的常识推测
*找同义词,同义解释,反义词,反义解释:在上下文中找出生词的其他表示方法,由此推断其含义
*找同位词:上下文中有可能有类似生词出现的句子的平行结构,找出其中和生词处于同一位置的词去推测
4.句义题的解题技巧
*正确选项不含有意义过于绝对化的词语,而是使用不肯定语气或意义解释深刻
*含原文词或短语越多,就越不可能是正确选项
(四)推理引申题
1.推理引申题的选项特点与答题技巧
干扰项的特点
*只是原文的简单复述,而非推断出来的结论,把直接表达当作间接推理
*看似从原文推断出来的结论,然而实际上与原文不符,如因果倒置,手段变目的等
*根据考生已有的常识是正确的,但是却不是基于文章,一切以文章为准
*推理过头,引申过渡
正确选项的特点
*不是文中明确说明的内容,没有引申推理就不是正确选项
*正确选项大多含义深刻,不是常识选项
[注意]
*注意那些似乎话中有话的的间接表达句,它们往往采用说半句,打比喻,反着说的方式,让考生有推理的余地
*注意含义深刻或结构复杂的句子.考生对作者表达的意思能不能一下子看透,也是命题点所在
(五)事实细节题
1.事实细节题的选项特点
正确选项特点
*一般可以在文章中直接或间接找到答案,但是不可能与阅读材料一模一样,而是用不同的词语或句型表达相同的意思
题干+正确选项的信息值等于或者约等于原文中某句的信息值
体现中心思想,一篇试题的细节与主旨直接关联
干扰选项的特点
*部分正确,部分错误
*是原文信息,但是不是题目要求的内容
*符合常识,但不是文章内容
*与原句的内容极为相似,只是在程度上有些变动
2.事实细节题的解题技巧
*主旨与细节是相辅相成的,确定了主题,才能深刻理解材料的作用.同样,对具体细节有较为全面的理解,就能更好的判明主题
*文章的事实细节内容不会孤立的出现,它与前后的内容密切相关,考生要善于利用因果,类比,时间,空间的关系将零碎的细节组成一个有机整体
*看细节内容要"跳出来"看,即要对文章的组织结构有很清楚的认识,然后判断这个细节为什么主题服务
*坚决遵循"本本主义",文章里有什么就用什么,不可凭感觉发挥做题2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义定语从句
定语从句及相关术语
1.定语从句：定语从句是由关系代词或关系副词引导的从句，其作用是作定语修饰主句的某个名词性成分，相当于形容词，所以又称为形容词性从句，一般紧跟在它所修饰的先行词后面。
2.关系词：引导定语从句的关联词称为关系词，关系词有关系代词和关系副词。关系代词有that, which, who, whom, whose, as等；关系副词有where, when, why等。关系词常有3个作用：1，引导定语从句。2，代替先行词。3，在定语从句中担当一个成分。
注：关系代词有主语.宾语之分。一般whom作为宾语。
4.定语：定语用来限定、修饰名词或代词的，是对名词或代词起修饰、限定作用的词、短语或句子，汉语中常用‘……的’表示。主要由形容词担任。此外，名词，代词，数词，分词，副词，不定式以及介词短语也可以来担任，也可以由一个句子来担任．单词作定语时通常放在它所修饰的词之前，作前置定语。短语和从句作定语时则放在所修饰的词之后，作后置定语。
先行词：被定语从句修饰的名词、代词称为先行词。
（一） 限定性定语从句
一、关系代词（在句中作主语、宾语或定语）
1. that既可代表事物也可代表人，which代表事物；它们在从句中作主语或宾语，that在从句中作宾语时常可省略关系词，which在从句中作宾语也可以省略。[eg：this is the book （which）you want。]
2而且，如果which在从句中作“不及物动词＋介词”的介词的宾语，注意介词不要丢掉，而且介词总是放在关系代词which的前边，但有的则放在它原来的位置
3. 代表物时多用which，但在带有下列词的句子中用that而不用which，这些词包括当先行词是anything, everything, nothing , none等不定代词时，或者是由every, any, all, some, no, little, few, much等修饰时等，这时的that常被省略 还有先行词前有序数词或形容词最高级修饰时,或先行词就是序数词或最高级时.以及先行词中既有人又有物时.还有句中前面有which时,都只能用that
4. who和whom引导的从句用来修饰人，分别作从句中的主语和宾语，whom作宾语时，要注意它可以作动词的宾语也可以作介词的宾语
5. whose是关系代词，修饰名词作定语，相当于所修饰成分的前置所有格.它引导的从句可以修饰人和物, 当它引导的从句修饰物体时, 可以与 of which 调换,表达的意思一样。
二、关系副词（在句中作状语）
关系副词=介词+关系代词
why=for which
where=in/ at/ on/ ... which (介词同先行词搭配)
when=during/ on/ in/ ... which (介词同先行词搭配)
1. where是关系副词，用来表示地点的定语从句。
2. when引导定语从句表示时间［注］值得一提的是，表示时间“time"一词的定语从句只用when引导，有时不用任何关系代词，当然也不用that引导。
By the time you arrive in London, we will have stayed there for two weeks. I still remember the first time I met her. Each time he goes to business trip, he brings a lot of living necessities, such as towels, soap, toothbrush etc。
3. 当从句的逻辑主语是some, any, no, somebody, anybody, nobody, something, anything, everything或nothing时，常用there is来引导
There is somebody here who wants to speak to you. 这里有人要和你说话。
（二）非限定性定语从句
非限定性定语从句的作用是对所修饰的成分作进一步说明，通常是引导词和先行词之间用逗号隔开，将从句拿掉后其他部分仍可成立
1. which引导的非限定性定语从句来说明前面整个句子的情况或主句的某一部分
2.当先行词是专有名词或物主代词和指示代词所修饰时，其后的定语从句通常是非限制性的，例如：
Charles Smith, who was my former teacher, retired last year. 查理·史密斯去年退休了，他曾经是我的老师。
My house, which I bought last year, has got a lovely garden. 我去年买的的那幢房子带着个漂亮的花园。
This novel, which I have read three times, is very touching. 这本小说很动人，我已经读了三遍。
3.非限制性定语从句还能将整个主句作为先行词, 对其进行修饰, 这时从句谓语动词要用第三人称单数，例如：
He seems not to have grasped what I meant, which greatly upsets me. 他似乎没抓住我的意思，这使我心烦。
Liquid water changes to vapor, which is called evaporation. 液态水变为蒸汽，这就叫做蒸发。
4. 有时as也可用作关系代词
5. 在非限定性定语从句中，不能用关系副词why和关系代词that，而用who, whom代表人，用which,whose代表事物.；
（三）关系代词引导的定语从句
1.who指人在从句中做主语
(1) The boys who are playing football are from Class One. 在踢足球的男孩们是一班的.
(2) Yesterday I helped an old man who lost his way. 昨天，我帮助了一个迷路的老人.
2. whom指人，在定语从句中充当宾语，常可省略。（注：who和whom已无太大区别，可以通用。）
(1) Mr. Liu is the person (whom) you talked with on the bus. 刘先生就是在公交车上和你聊天的那个人.
(2) Mr. Ling is just the boy whom I want to see. 凌先生恰巧就是我想见的那个男孩.
(3) The man who/whom you met just now is my friend. 你刚刚见到的那个人就是我的朋友.
注意：关系代词whom在口语和非正式语体中常用who代替，可省略。
如果在从句中做宾语,就用whom或who.比如: He is the man whom/who I talk to. 他就是那个和我聊天的男人.
如果是在从句中作主语就只能用who.比如: He is the man who has an English book. 他就是那个有英语书的男人.
3.which指物，在定语从句中做主语或者宾语，做宾语时可省略
(1) Football is a game which is liked by most boys. 足球是大多数男孩都喜欢的游戏.
(2) This is the pen (which) he bought yesterday. 这是他昨天刚买的钢笔.
4. that指人时，相当于who或者whom；指物时，相当于which。
在定语从句中做主语或者宾语，做宾语时可省略。
(5) The number of the people that/who come to visit the city each year rises one million.
(6) Where is the man that/whom I saw this morning
5. whose通常指人，也可指物，在定语从句中做定语
(1) He has a friend whose father is a doctor.
(2) I once lived in a house whose roof has fallen in.whose指物时，常用以下结构来代替
(3) The classroom whose door is broken will soon be repaired.
(4) The classroom the door of which is broken will soon be repaired.
(5) Do you like the book whose color is yellow
(6) Do you like the book the color of which is yellow
（四）注意
介词+关系代词引导的定语从句关系代词在定语从句中做介词宾语时
从句常由介词+关系代词引导
(1) The school (that/which) he once studied in is very famous.
(2) The school in which he once studied is very famous.
(3) Tomorrow I will bring here a magazine (that/which) you asked for.
(4) Tomorrow I will bring here a magazine for which you asked.
(5) We’ll go to hear the famous singer (whom/that/who) we have often talked about.
(6) We’ll go to hear the famous singer about whom we have often talked.
注意：1. 含有介词的动词短语一般不拆开使用，如：look for, look after, take care of等
(1) This is the watch which/that I am looking for. (T＝正确)
(2) This is the watch for which I am looking. (F＝错误)
2. 若介词放在关系代词前，关系代词指人时用whom，不可用who或者that；指物时用which，不能用that；关系代词是所有格时用whose
(1) The man with whom you talked is my friend. (T)
(2) The man with that you talked is my friend. (F)
(3) The plane in which we flew to Canada is very comfortable. (T)
(4) The plane in that we flew in to Canada is very comfortable. (F)
3. “介词+关系代词”前可有some, any, none, both, all, neither, most, each, few等代词或者数词
(1) He loved his parents deeply, both of whom are very kind to him.
(2) In the basket there are quite many apples, some of which have gone bad.
(3) There are forty students in our class in all, most of whom are from big cities.
关系代词
关系代词（一般情况下）that 可用who ,whom 和which在从句做主语，谓动词的宾语，但是不能做介词的宾语
which指物，在从句中作主语，谓语或宾语；
who在从句中作主语；
whom在从句中宾语；
where在从句中修饰表地点的名词，做地点状语；
when在从句中通常修饰表时间的名词，做时间状语；
why在从句中做原因状语，先行词通常是"reason"
有时why也可用for+which代替。
例：A doctor is a person who looks after people's health.
______ _ _____ _____________________
主语 谓语 先行词 从句
|________________________|
定语从句修饰先行词
（五）关系副词引导的定语从句
1. when指时间，在定语从句中做时间状语
(1) I still remember the day when I first came to the school.
(2) The time when we got together finally came.
2. where指地点，在定语从句中做地点状语
(1) Shanghai is the city where I was born.
(2) The house where I lived ten years ago has been pulled down.
3. why指原因，在定语从句中做原因状语
(1) Please tell me the reason why you missed the plane.
(2) I don’t know the reason why he looks unhappy today.
注意：关系副词引导的从句可以由“介词+关系代词”引导的从句替换
(1) The reason why/ for which he refused the invitation is not clear,
(2) From the year when/in which he was going to school he began to know what he wanted when he grew up.
(3) Great changes have taken place in the city in which./where I was born.
（六）判断关系代词与关系副词
方法一： 用关系代词，还是关系副词完全取决于从句中的谓语动词。不及物动词后面无宾语，就必须要求用关系副词或者是介词加关系代词；而及物动词后接宾语，则要求用关系代词。例如：
This is the mountain village where I stayed last year.
I'll never forget the days when I worked together with you.
判断改错（注：先显示题，再显示答案，横线；用不同的颜色表示出。）
（错） This is the mountain village where I visited last year.
（错） I will never forget the days when I spent in the countryside.
（对） This is the mountain village (which) I visited last year.
（对） I'll never forget the days (which) I spent in the countryside.
习惯上总把表地点或时间的名词与关系副词 where, when联系在一起。此两题错在关系词的误用上。
方法二： 准确判断先行词在定语从句中的成分(主、谓、宾、定、状)，也能正确选择出关系代词/关系副词。例1. Is this museum ___ you visited a few days ago
A. where B. that C. on which D. the one
例2. Is this the museum ____ the exhibition was held
A. where B. that C. on which D. the one答案：
例1 D，例2 A
例1变为肯定句： This museum is ___ you visited a few days ago.例2变为肯定句： This is the museum ___ the exhibition was held.
在句1中，is后应跟表语，只有the one可以，而后面的you visited a few days ago则做one的定语从句。
而句2中, 主、谓、宾俱全，从句部分为句子的状语表地点，既可用副词where，又因 in the museum词组，可用介词in + which 引导地点状语。而此题中，介词on 用的不对，所以选A。
关系词的选择依据在从句中所做的成分，先行词在从句中做主、定、宾语时，选择关系代词 (who, whom, that, which, whose)；
先行词在从句中做状语时，应选择关系副词 ( where 地点状语，when 时间状语，why 原因状语) 。
（七）介词+关系词
1）介词后面的关系词不能省略。
2）that前不能有介词。
3） 某些在从句中充当时间，地点或原因状语的"介词+关系词"结构可以同关系副词when ,where和why 互换。 This is the house in which I lived two years ago.
This is the house where I lived two years ago.
Do you remember the day on which you joined our club
Do you remember the day when you joined our club
This is the reason why he came late.
This is the reason for which he came late.
（八）先行词和关系词二合一
1)Whoever spits in public will be punished here. (Whoever 可以用 anyone who 代替) 2)The parents will use what they have to send their son to technical school. (what 可以用all that代替)
但这两句句子已经不是定语从句了，是名词性从句。因为定语从句一定要有先行词，而名词性从句没有。将“Whoever”、“what”分别用“Anyone who”、“all that”代替后，才是定语从句，先行词分别是“Anyone”、“all”。
（九）as,which引导的非限定性定语从句
由as, which 引导的非限定性定语从句，as和which可代整个主句，相当于and this或and that。As一般放在句首，which在句中。
As we know, smoking is harmful to one's health.
The sun heats the earth, which is very important to us.
典型例题
1）Alice received an invitation from her boss, ___came as a surprise.
A. it B. that C. which D. he
答案C. 此为非限定性从句，不能用 that修饰，而用which.，it 和he 都使后句成为句子，两个独立的句子不能单以逗号连接。况且选he句意不通。
2）The weather turned out to be very good, ___ was more than we could expect.
A. what B. which C. that D. it
答案B。
which可代替句子，用于非限定性定语从句，而what不可。That 不能用于非限定性定语从句，it不为连词，使由逗号连接的两个句子并在一起在英语语法上行不通。
3）It rained hard yesterday, ____ prevented me from going to the park..
A. that B. which C. as D. it
答案B.
as 和which在引导非限制性定语从句时，这两个关系代词都指主句所表达的整个意思，且在定语从句中都可以作主语和宾语。但不同之处主要有两点：
(1） as 引导的定语从句可置于句首，而which不可。
(2） as 代表前面的整个主句并在从句中作主语时，从句中的谓语必须是系动词；若为行为动词，则从句中的关系代词只能用which.。
在本题中，prevent由于是行为动词，所以正确选项应为B。
As 的用法例
1. the same… as；such…as 中的as 是一种固定结构, 和……一样……。
I have got into the same trouble as he (has).
例2. as可引导非限制性从句，常带有'正如'。
As we know, smoking is harmful to one's health.
As is known, smoking is harmful to one's health.
As是关系代词。例1中的as作know的宾语；
例2中，它充当从句的主语，谓语动词know要用被动式。
一、“as / which” 特殊定语从句的先行成分
1. 形容词或形容词短语作先行成分, 具有形容词意义的介词短语也可以充当先行成分，如：
My grandmother’s house was always of great importance to me, as my own is.
在一定的语言环境里，有些名词可以具有形容词的性质。这些名词主要是那些表示人的身份、职业、状态的名词。值得一提的是，在这些具有形容词性质的名词之后，引导定语从句的关系代词不能用who / whom.
2. 动词短语先行成分
这种动词短语既可是限定形式也可是非限定形式。如果是动态动词短语，它们在从句中就一般有限定或非限定形式的替代动词do和as / which一起代替。do可以出现，也可以不出现，但不能用其它动词代替。
3. 句子作先行成分
这句子可以是整个主句也可以只是主句中的一个从句。有时是连续几个句子，有时甚至可以是一个完整的故事。
二、“as/which”特殊定语从句在句中的位置
由于先行成分的构成成分不同，“as/which”特殊定语从句在句中的位置有以下几种情况：
1. 形容词做先行成分时：形容词或形容词短语（含具有形容词性质的名词）作先行成分，“as / which”特殊定语从句置于先行成分之后。
2. 动词短语作先行成分时：动词短语作先行成分时，“as / which”特殊定语从句置于先行成分之后。但是，当从句中含有表示主观意志的插入成分时，“as”特殊定语从句可以移至句子之首。
3. 句子作先行成分时：“as”特殊定语从句的位置较灵活，可以置于先行成分之前、之中或之后。但如果先行成分是直接引语，“as”特殊定语从句多在先行成分之前。如果先行成分是否定句，“as”特殊定语从句与否定词的相对位置不同可以使它产生不同的意义。由于“as”特殊定语从句具有这一特点，所以有时它的位置不能随便移动。在非正式的文体里，“which”特殊定语从句可以出现在先行成分之中。
三、“as/which”特殊定语从句的语义功能
一般说来，as与which的语义功能相同，可以相互替换。但先行成分为句子时，它们的语义功能则有差异。
1. 表示结果
表示结果的特殊定语从句与其先行成分之间存在着一定的因果关系，从句中往往使用有结果意义的词，如动词result, make, enable, cause和形容词interesting, surprising, delightful, disgraceful等。
2. 表示评注
表示评注的特殊定语从句对其先行成分所述事实的正确性有肯定的倾向，它通常与那些表示客观事实，普遍真理或某种习性的先行成分连用；从句中则常用一些表示“合乎自然规律”、“众所周知”或“经常发生”等意义的词语，如natural, known to all, usual等。
3. 有无状语意义
“as”特殊定语从句具有状语意义（主要是方式状语意义），而“which”特殊定语从句则无状语意义。“as”特殊定语从句的状语意义要求它在语义上与其先行成分的语义保持一致，“which”特殊定语从句则不受这种限制。
四、关系代词as与which的句法功能
1. as / which 在特殊定语从句中作主语。
as作主语时，谓语动词常为连系动词（主要是be, seem），主语补语为usual、 a rule、 a matter of fact等时，系动词be习惯经常省略。行为动词作“as”特殊定语从句的谓语时一般用于被动语态（其中助动词be常略），不及物的行为动词在“as”特殊定语从句中作谓语的极少，常见的有happen一词。如：
Freddie, as might be expected, was attending the conference.
Which作主语时，谓语动词不限，主语被动皆可，只是谓语动词为被动语态时助动词be省略。
2. as和which都可以在特殊定语从句中宾语。
3. as和 which在特殊定语从句中作补语。如：
We thought him a gentleman, as/which he could never be.
“as”特殊定语从句中可以主谓倒装，“which”从句中则不能主谓倒装。
如果先行成分不是主语补语或宾语补语，关系代词用which而不用as。如：
He talked like a native, which/as he hardly was.
4. which在特殊从定语句中作定语。
which可以在特殊定语从句中作定语，修饰fact, matter, thing 等名词。这些名词代表先行成分表达的意义，有时将其略去句义仍然完整。as不能作定语。如：
I was told to go not by train but bus, which advice I followed.
（十）关系代词that 的用法
(1)不用that的情况
(a) 在引导非限定性定语从句时。
(错)The tree, that is four hundred years old, Is very famous here.
(b) 介词后不能用。
We depend on the land from which we get our food.
We depend on the land that/which we get our food from.
(2) 只能用that作为定语从句的关系代词的情况
(a) 在there be 句型中，只用that，不用which。
(b) 在不定代词，如：anything, nothing, the one, all, much, few, any, little等作先行词时，只用that，不用which。
(c) 先行词有the only, the very,the same,the last,just修饰时，只用that。
(d) 先行词为序数词、数词、形容词最高级时，只用that。.
(e) 先行词既有人，又有物时。
(f) 先行词指物，在主句中作表语时．
(g) 为了避免重复．
(h)先行词是the way时
举例：
Is this the book that you borrowed in the library
这是你在图书馆借的那本书吗？
Who that break the window should be punished．
谁打碎了窗户都要受到惩罚．
All that is needed is a supply of oil.
所需的只是供油问题。
Finally, the their handed everything that he had stolen to the police.
那贼最终把偷的全部东西交给了警察。
（十一）定语从句的难点分析
（一）限制性定语从句只能用that的几种情况
1．当先行词是anything, everything, nothing (something 除外), few, all, none, little, some等代词时，或者是由every, any, all, some, no, little, few, much，each等修饰时
(1) Have you taken down everything (that) Mr. Li has said
(2) There seems to be nothing (that) seems impossible for him in the world.
(3) All that can be done has been done.
(4) There is little (that) I can do for you.
注意1：部分时候that可以省略，如部分例句将that用括号括住。
注意2：当先行词指人时，偶尔也可以用who
(4) Any man that/.who has a sense of duty won’t do such a thing.
2. 当先行词被序数词修饰
(1) The first place that they visited in London was the Big Ben.
3. 当先行词被形容词最高级修饰时
(1) This is the best film that I have seen.
4. 当形容词被the very, the only，the same,the last 修饰时
(1) This is the very good dictionary that I want to buy,
(2) After the fire in his house, the old car is the only thing that he owned.
当先行词指人时，偶尔也可以用who
(3) Wang Hua is the only person in our school who will attend the meeting？
5. 当先行词前面有who, which等疑问代词时
(1) Who is the man that is standing there
(2) Which is the T-shirt that fits me most
6. 当先行词既有人，也有动物或者物体时
(1) Can you remember the scientist and his theory that we have learned
7.当关系代词在定语从句中做表语或先行词本身就作主语的表语
(1)The village is no longer the one that it used to be 10 years ago.
(2)This is a good book that will help you a lot.
（二）关系代词as和which引导的定语从句as和which引导非限制性定语从句，有相同之处也有不同之处。具体情况是：
1．As和which都可以在定语从句中做主语或者宾语，代表前面整个句子。
(1) He married her, as/which was natural.
(2) He was honest, as/which we can see.
2. as 引导非限制性定语从句，可放在主句之前，或者主句之后，甚至可以切割一个主句；which引导的非限制性定语从句只能放在主句之后。另外，as有“正如……，正像……”的意思
(1) As is known to all, China is a developing country.
(2) He is from the south, as we can see from his accent.
(3) John, as you know, is a famous writer.
(4) He has been to Paris more than several times, which I don’t believe.
注意：当主句和从句存在逻辑上的因果关系时，常用which
(5) Tom was always late for school, which made his teacher angry.
3. 当先行词受such, the same修饰时，常用as
(1) I have never heard such a story as he tells.
(2) He is not such a fool as he looks.
(3) This is the same book as I lost last week.
注意：当先行词由the same修饰时，偶尔也用that引导定语从句，但是和由as所引导的定语从句意思不同
(4) She wore the same dress that she wore at Mary’s wedding.
她穿着她在MARY婚礼上穿过的一条裙子。
(5) She wore the same dress as her young sister wore. 她穿着和她妹妹所穿的一样的裙子。
注意：定语从句such…as …与结果状语从句such… that
…的区别：as在所引导的定语从句中作主语，宾语；that在结果状语从句中不做成分
(6)He has such a good laptop as I want to buy.
(7)He has such a good laptop that I want to by one.
(三）以the way为先行词的定语从句通常由in which, that引导，而且通常可以省略。
(1) The way in which/ that/./ he answered the question was surprising.
(四) but有时也可以做关系词引导定语从句
(1) There are very few but understand his idea.
( but= who don’t )
(五) 区分定语从句和同位语从句
1．定语从句修饰先行词，它和先行词是修饰关系；
同位语从句说明先行词的具体内容，是补充说明的关系
(1) The plane that has just taken off is for London. 定语从句
(2) The fact that he has been dead is clear. 同位语从句
2．定语从句由关系代词或者关系副词引导，关系词在句中充当成分，有时可以省略；
同位语从句主要由that引导，在句中一般不做成分；
句子也可以由when, where, how, why, whether, what等词引导，充当成分
(1) The news he told me is true.
(2) The news that he has just died is true.
(3) The problem that we are facing now is how we can collect so much money. 定语
(4) The problem how we can collect so much money is difficult to solve.
3. 同位语从句和先行词一般可以用be动词发展成一个完整的句子，而定语从句不可以
(1) The idea that we could ask the teacher for advice is wonderful. 同位语
(2) The idea was that we could ask the teacher for advice.
(3) The fact that the earth moves around the earth is known to all.
(4) The fact is that the earth moves around the earth.
18. 定语从句
定语从句（Attributive Clauses）在句中做定语，修饰一个名词或代词，被修饰的名词,词组或代词即先行词。定语从句通常出现在先行词之后，由关系词（关系代词或关系副词）引出。
关系代词有：who, whom, whose, that, which等。
关系副词有： when, where, why等。
18.1 关系代词引导的定语从句
关系代词所代替的先行词是人或物的名词或代词，并在句中充当主语、宾语、定语等成分。关系代词在定语从句中作主语时，从句谓语动词的人称和数要和先行词保持一致。
1）who, whom, that
这些词代替的先行词是人的名词或代词，在从句中所起作用如下：
Is he the man who/that wants to see you
他就是你想见的人吗？（who/that在从句中作主语）
He is the man whom/ that I saw yesterday.
他就是我昨天见的那个人。（whom/that在从句中作宾语）
2) Whose 用来指人或物，(只用作定语, 若指物，它还可以同of which互换）, 例如：
They rushed over to help the man whose car had broken down. 那人车坏了，大家都跑过去帮忙。
Please pass me the book whose (of which) cover is green. 请递给我那本绿皮的书。
3）which, that
它们所代替的先行词是事物的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等，例如：
A prosperity which / that had never been seen before appears in the countryside. 农村出现了前所未有的繁荣。（which / that在句中作宾语）
The package (which / that) you are carrying is about to come unwrapped. 你拿的包快散了。(which / that在句中作宾语）
［定语从句］介词+关系词
1）介词后面的关系词不能省略。
2）that前不能有介词。
3）某些在从句中充当时间，地点或原因状语的"介词+关系词"结构可以同关系副词when 和where 互换。例如：
This is the house in which I lived two years ago. 这是我两年前住过的房子。
This is the house where I lived two years ago.
Do you remember the day on which you joined our club？ 还记得你加入我们俱乐部的那一天吗？
Do you remember the day when you joined our club？
that的比用。。先行词是最高级2012届高考英语语法专题复习冠词高考四大考点
1.冠词的特指与泛指
冠词是历年来高考考查的重点，也是学生答题的难点。其解题的关键是对试题中所设定的语境的特指与泛指做出准确判断。如果试题涉及的是同类事物中不确定的一个，则用不定冠词；如果是特定的具体的一个，则用定冠词。
例句：
For him a stage is just a means of making a living. (山东)
As he reached the front door, Jack saw a strange sight. (全国II)
3) Take your time-it’s just a short distance from here to the restaurant. (山东)
4) I ate a sandwich while I was waiting for the 20:08 train. （陕西）
练习：
1）______ apple fell from the tree and hit him on ______ head. （浙江）
A. An; the B. The; the C. An; 不填 D. The; 不填
2）______recent report stated that the number of Spanish speakers in the U.S. would be higher than the number of English speakers by ____year 2090.
A. A; the B.A; / C. The ; / D. The; a
3)My neighbor asked me to go for ______ walk, but I don’t think I’ve got ______ energy.
A. a; 不填 B. the; the C. 不填；the D. a; the（辽宁）
4)We have every reason to believe that ______ 2008 Beijing Olympic Games will be ______ success.
A. / … a B. the … / C. the … a D. a … a（江苏）
5)I like _____ color of your skirt. It is _____ good match for your blouse.
A. a; the B. a; a C. the; a D. the; the（浙江）
6) Of all reasons for my decision to become a university professor, my father’s advice was most important one. （辽宁）
A. the;a B.不填；a C.不填;the D. the; the
Key: 1A 2. A 3.D 4.C 5.C 6. A
2.冠词的类指
类指是指具有共同性质或典型特征的事物的一个类别。专指，是指类别中的某个或某些具体的人或事物。其用法具体分析如下：
1)a/an +单数名词，指类别中任何一个所具有的特点。例如：
A dog is a common animal.
A car runs fast than a bus.
2) the + 单数名词， 指的是整个类别所具有的特点，以区别于其它类别。例如：
The compass was invented in China, but the computer was not.
The tiger is in danger of becoming extinct.
3) 复数名词前面没有任何冠词，表示整个类别的共同特点。例如：
I saw tigers in the zoo. Horses are useful animals.
4)物质名词、抽象名词前面没有任何冠词表示整个类别所具有的特点。例如：
Air is invisible but water is. Failure is the mother of success.
5) the + 形容词表示一类人或事物。例如：
We must show respect to the old.
The young are the future of our country.
练习：
1）I know you don’t like____music very much. But what do you think of____music in the film we saw yesterday （全国2）
A. /; / B. the; the C. the; / D. /; the
2）The biggest whale is ___ blue whale, which grows to be about 29 meters long— the height of _____9-story building. (北京)
A. the; the B. a; a C. a; the D. the; a
3）Many people have come to realize that they should go on balanced diet and make room in their day for exercise.
A. a;/ B. the ; a C. the; the D./;a（江西）
4）Washing machines made by China have won____worldwide attention and Haier has become _____popular name. (重庆)
A. a; the B./;a C./;the D. the; a
5）In many places in China, ___ bicycle is still ___ popular means of transportation.
A. a; the B. /; a C. the; a D. the; the（重庆）
6）It is generally accepted that boy must learn to stand up and fight like man.
A. a; a B. a; the C. the; the D. a; 不填（2011全国1）
Key: 1.D 2. D. 3. A 4.B 5. C 6. A
3.冠词的习惯用法
冠词的习惯用法也是试题经常考查的内容，它往往没有规律可循。解决这类问题，需要考生的平常积累。
例句：
1）The book tells a life story of John Smith, who left school and worked for a newspaper at the age of 16.
2) Students should be encouraged to use the Internet as a resource. （山东）
3) We went right round to the west coast by sea instead of driving across the continent.
4) First impressions are the most lasting. After all, you never get a second chance to make the
first impression.
练习：
1.To tell _ truth, his coming is really ____ big surprise to most people present at the party.
A. 不填； a B. the; 不填 C. the; a D. 不填; 不填
2. The students were studying in ____ classroom when, all of ___ sudden, the lights went out.
A. 不填; 不填 B. a; the C. the; a D. the; 不填
3.My mother asked me to repeat__telephone number__second time so that she could write it down.
A. the; a B. a ; the C. an; a D. the ; the
4.I wonder what it feels to be one of ___ really rich. The Browns already have two Rolls Royce and now they are buying _____ third.
A. the ; a B. the ; the C. 不填; a D. the ; a
5. .Everything comes with price; there is no such thing as a free lunch in the world.
A.a , a B.the , 不填 C.the , a D.a , 不填（重庆）
6. There are over 58, 000 rocky objects in _______ space, about 900 of which could fall down onto _______ earth. (全国卷1)
A．the; the B. 不填; the C．the; 不填 D．a; the
Key : 1. C 2. C 3. A 4.A 5. D 6. B
4. 冠词灵活运用的考查
随着高考的不断改革和发展，对冠词的考查多次出现在具体语境中灵活运用的题目。一些冠词的常规用法随着语境的变化发生了相应的变化。
例句：
1）George couldn't remember when he first met Mr. Anderson, but he was sure it was a Sunday because everybody was at church. （重庆）
2) –Could you tell me the way to the Johnsons, please
--Sorry, we don’t have a Johnson here in the village.（全国2）
练习：
1）- Hello, could I speak to Mr. Smith
- Sorry, wrong number. There isn't______ Mr. Smith here. （全国1）
A. 不填 B. a C. the D. one
2）Dr. Peter Spence, headmaster of the school, told us,“ fifth of pupils here go on to study at Oxford and Cambridge”.（2011四川）
A.不填；A B.不填；The C. the; The D a; A
3) ------It’s said John will be in a job paying over 860,00 _____ year
--Right, he will also get paid by __________ week.
A. the, the B. a; the C. the; a D. a; a
4) .Experts think that ____recently discovered painting may be _____ Picasso.
A. the.不填 B. a; the C. a;不填 D. the; a（2011浙江）
5）The visitors here are greatly impressed by the fact that_______ people from all walks of life are working hard for_____ new Jiangsu. （江苏卷）
A.不填; a B. 不填;the C. the; a D. the; the
6）What I need is _____ book that contains _____ ABC of oil painting. (全国II)
A. a；不填 B. the; 不填 C. the; an D. a; the
参考答案
1.B 2. A 3. B 4. D 5. A 6. D2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义词汇have用法大全
“have+宾语+非谓语动词”结构的用法
“have+宾语+非谓语动词”是高考英语中一个非常重要的考点，请先看几道考题：
1. —Excuse me sir, where is Room 301
—Just a minute. I’ll have Bob ______ you to your room. (2007北京卷)
A. show B. shows C. to show D. showing
2. — Did Peter fix the computer himself
— He ______, because he doesn’t know much about computers. (2007安徽卷)
A. has it fixed B. had fixed it C. had it fixed D. fixed it
3. Jenny hopes that Mr. Smith will suggest a good way to have her written English ______ in a short period. (2007福建卷)
A. improved B. improving C. to improve D. improve
以上三道题的答案分别为ACA。你知道是为什么吗？下面我们就为同学全面归纳“have+宾语+非谓语动词”这一结构的用法。
一、have + 宾语 + 不定式
该结构中have的基本意思是“有”，其主要用法有：
1. 表示有某事要做，其中的不定式为定语。如：
She didn’t have the courage to refuse. 她没有勇气拒绝。
Birds have the instinct to learn to fly. 鸟有飞的本能(from www.)。
We have every reason to think he may still be alive. 我们有充分理由认为他可能还活着。
2. 表示因为有A结果发生了B，其中的不定式为结果状语。如：
I had the luck to find him at home. 我真幸运，找他时他正在家。They had the misfortune to be hit by a violent storm. 他们不幸遇上了猛烈的风暴。
二、have + 宾语 + 动词原形
该结构中的动词原形，实为省略了to的不定式，用作宾语补足语，其中的have为使役动词。该结构的主要用法有：
1. 表示叫(请、使、让)某人做某事。如：
He had his son clean the car. 他叫他的儿子擦车。
I’ll have the gardener plant some trees. 我要让园丁种些树。
Don’t interrupt her：let her have her say. 别打断她的话，让她把意见说出来。
2. 表示容忍或允许某人做某事(用于否定句，尤与 won’t, can’t连用)。如：
I won’t have you tell me what to do. 我不能让你对我做的 事指手划脚。
三、have + 宾语 + 现在分词
该结构中的现在分词用作宾语补足语，其中的have为使役动词。该结构的主要用法有：
1. 表示使(让)某人(某事物)一直做在做某事或处于做某事的状态之中。如：
She had her audience listening attentively. 她使听众听得入神(from www.)。
Within minutes he had the whole audience laughing and clapping. 没出几分钟他就让全体听众笑起来，鼓起掌来。
The film had us all sitting on the edges of our seats with excitement. 这部影片让我们大家激动不已。
2. 表示容忍或允许某人做某事(用于否定句，尤与 won’t, can’t连用)。如：
He won’t have boys arriving late. 他不允许孩子们迟到。
I won’t have you smoking at your age. 我不能让你在这个年纪就抽烟。
I hate to have my boss standing over me. 我不喜欢上司监督我。
3. 说服或命令某人做某事。如：
He had me doing all kinds of jobs for her. 他叫我为她做各种事情。
注：have difficult [problem] doing sth是英语中一个很有用的句式，其中的have表示“有”，
We had the greatest difficulty imaginable getting here in time. 我们为了及时赶到此地，经历了可能想见的最大的困难。
四、have + 宾语 + 过去分词
该结构中的过去分词用作宾语补足语，其中的have为使役动词。该结构的最大特点就是，其中的过去分词与其前的宾语有被动关系。具体说来，该结构有以下主要用法：
1. 表示请(让)别人做某事。如：
We had the machine repaired. 我们请人修理了机器(from www.)。
She’s gone into hospital to have her appendix taken out. 她已住院去切除阑尾。
What beautiful curls — why do you want to have them cut off 你那鬈发多漂亮啊——为什么要剪掉呢
注：有时指无意志的行为。如：
He had his salary raised. 他加薪了。
2. 表示经历或遭遇某情况。如：
He had his finger cut. 他的手指弄伤了。
I had my watch stolen yesterday. 我的表昨天被人偷去了。
3.表示主动地完成某动作或解决某事。如：
I’ve had all my mistakes corrected. 我已把所有的错误都改正过来了。
You should understand the traffic rule by now. You’ve had it explained often enough 到现在你应该理解这条交通规则了，已经给你解释得够多了。(2005天津卷)
I have had everything prepared beforehand. 我已事先把一切都准备好了。
Paul’s mother had him adopted because she couldn’t look after him herself. 保罗的母亲因为自己无力抚养他，便将他送给别人收养了(from www.)。
4. 表示容忍或允许做某事(用于否定句，尤与 won’t, can’t 等连用)。如：
We won’t have anything said against the Party. 我们不允 许有人这样攻击党。
注意，下面一句中的worried可视为形容词，而非过去分词：
The news had me worried. 我听了这消息十分不安。2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义非谓语动词
1. The ability ______ an idea is as important as the idea itself. (2011·湖南卷21)
A. expressing B. expressed
C. to express D. to be expressed
【解析】选C。主语the ability 为“能力”，抽象名词。通常使用动词不定式作定语。句意：表达思想的能力与思想本身同等重要。我们也可以联想到be able to do “能够干”而得出答案。
2. The players ______ from the whole country are expected to bring us honor in this summer game. (2011·湖南卷23)
A. selecting B. to select
C. selected D. having selected
【解析】选C。select 与the players 间有动宾关系。因此select用过去分词形式表被动完成。句意：从整个国家挑选出来的运动员有望在今年的夏季运动会给我们带来荣誉。
考点1.非谓语动词的逻辑主语
______ around the fire, the tourists danced with the local people. (2011·辽宁卷30)
A. Gather B. To gather
C. Gathering D. To be gathering
【解析】选C。 句子主语是the tourists, gather和tourists存有逻辑上的主谓关系，因此用现在分词作状语。
非谓语动词
1. It's ＋ adj. ＋ for / of sb. to do sth.句型中的不定式的逻辑主语为“sb.”。
2. 非谓语动词作状语时，他们的逻辑主语一般就是句子的主语。当非谓语动词的动作由句子主语发出时，非谓语动词用主动形式；当非谓语动词的动作是句子主语所承受时，用过去分词或不定式、动词的 ing形式的被动形式。
3. “代词主格或名词的普通格 ＋ 非谓语动词”构成独立主格结构。非谓语动词逻辑主语为代词或名词。
4．动名词复合结构由“物主代词或名词所有格＋动名词”构成独立主格结构。这种结构既可用作主语，也可用作宾语，但作宾语时，还可用代词宾格或名词普通格＋动名词结构。
5．不定式的复合结构：for sb. to do sth.。
考点2.独立成分作状语
______you the truth, I feel like ______ to bed now.
A. Telling; going B. To tell; going
C. Telling; to go D. To tell; to go
【解析】选B。to tell you the truth作独立成分；like是介词，其后跟动名词作宾语。
非谓语动词作独立成分的有： judging by/ from, provided/ providing, given, to be true, to tell you the truth等。
考点3.非谓语动词的时态
例1：Claire had her luggage ______ an hour before her plane left. (2011·陕西卷14)
A. check B. checking
C. to check D. checked
【解析】选D。Claire在飞机起飞之前的一小时让人把行李检查了。have sth. done让某人做某事。
考点3.非谓语动词的时态
例2：The next thing he saw was smoke ______ from behind the house. (2011·新课标卷27)
A. rose B. rising
C. to rise D. risen
【解析】选B。句意：他接下来看见的事是从房子后面正冒着烟。现在分词rising表动作正在进行，和修饰词smoke间有主谓关系。rising from behind the house现在分词短语作后置定语。
动词不定式一般表示在谓语动作之后的事情，要表示发生在谓语动词所表示的动作之前的事情，须用不定式的完成式；动词的 ing形式一般表示与谓语动词动作同时进行的动作，若要表示发生在谓语动词所表示的动作之前的事情，须用动词的 ing形式的完成式。
考点4.非谓语动词的句法功能
1. 作主语、表语：
动名词表示一般性、经常性的动作。不定式表示一次性的动作。动名词、不定式作主语常用it作其形式主语，但no use, no good作表语时，真正主语常用动名词。
2. 作宾语：
(1)有些动词只跟动名词作宾语
常用的这类动词有： mind, finish, enjoy, excuse, imagine, keep, practice, suggest, miss, consider, prevent, appreciate, advise, avoid, allow, admit, delay, escape, permit, forbid等。
(2)有些动词只跟不定式作宾语
常用的这类动词有： want, wish, hope, expect, agree, decide, learn, pretend, ask, promise, plan, refuse, beg, demand, manage, offer, prepare, claim, struggle等。
(3)remember, forget, regret后接动名词和不定式的区别：后接动名词表示先于谓语动词的动作；后接不定式表示后于谓语动词的动作。
(4)want, need, require和deserve后接动名词和不定式的用法：当它们后面所接的动词与句子的主语是动宾关系时，用动名词的主动式或不定式的被动式。
(5)在try, stop, mean, go on, can't help后，用动名词和不定式所表达的含义不同，要注意：
try doing sth. 试着做某事
try to do sth. 尽力做某事
stop doing sth. 停止做某事
stop to do sth. 停下来做另一件不同的事
mean doing sth. 意味着做某事
mean to do sth. 打算做某事
go on doing sth. 继续做刚做的事
go on to do sth. 继续做另一件事
can't help doing sth. 情不自禁做某事
can't help (to) do sth. 不能帮助做某事
3. 作宾语补足语：
例1： Michael put up a picture of Yao Ming beside the bed to keep himself ______ of his own dreams. (2011·重庆卷33)
A. reminding B. to remind
C. reminded D. remind
【解析】选C。keep himself reminded of his own dreams(姚明的图片)使他想起自己的梦想。过去分词 reminded作宾补。
例2： Even the best writers sometimes find themselves ______ for words. (2011·浙江卷14)
A. lose B. lost
C. to lose D. having lost
【解析】选B。可以从lost for words. (欲言又止；迷失语言)这一习语来理解。动词lose的基本义是“使……迷路”，引申义是“使……沉溺于”(使动用法容易被考生忽略)，与逻辑主语themselves的关系是被动，只有选项B满足。
熟悉并掌握哪些动词或短语如advise, allow, like, wish, want, help等须接不定式作宾语补足语；哪些动词或短语如find, suggest, lead to等可接动词的 ing形式作宾语补足语；哪些动词或短语如feel, see, watch, hear, have 等既可接动词的 ing形式又可接过去分词作宾语补足语；何时用主动形式作宾语补足语，何时用被动形式或过去分词作宾语补足语，一般由非谓语动词与宾语的关系确定。
4. 作定语：
例1：On receiving a phone call from his wife ______ she had a fall, Mr. Gordon immediately rushed home from his office.(2011·江西卷32)
A. says B. said
C. saying D. to say
【解析】选C。saying作后置定语修饰a phone call from his wife来自他妻子的一个电话说。
4. 作定语：
例2：Tsinghua University, ______ in 1911, is home to a great number of outstanding figures. (2011·福建卷23)
A. found B. founding
C. founded D. to be founded
【解析】选C。过去分词founded(成立于)作非限制性定语修饰Tsinghua University(清华大学)。
(1) 注意非谓语动词的形式，不定式作定语一般用主动式，只有当不定式的逻辑主语不是句子的主语或宾语时，才用被动式；现在分词作定语表示主动意义，动作正在进行；过去分词一般表示被动、完成含义。
(2) 非谓语动词的位置：非谓语动词短语作定语时，都要放在所修饰的词之后；单个的动词的 ing形式或过去分词作定语时，一般放在所修饰的词之前。
不及物动词的不定式作定语，与修饰的名词构成动宾关系时，不及物动词后面的介词不能丢。
5. 不定式与现在分词作结果状语的区别：
不定式、现在分词都能表示结果，其区别是：不定式一般表示出乎意料的结果，不定式前常用only修饰；而动词的 ing形式表示自然或必然的结果。
More highways have been built in China, ______ it much easier for people to travel from one place to another. (2011·陕西卷20)
A. making B. made
C. to make D. having made
【解析】选A。句意：在中国更多的公路已被修建，这样使得人们从一个地方到另一个地方更为容易。making分词短语表意料之中的结果。若是only to make则表示意料之外的结果。
考点5.不定式to的省略
1. 动词see, watch, hear, feel, notice, observe, look at, listen to, let, have, make 接不定式作宾补时，不定式的to须省略，但句子变为被动语态时，不定式的to不能省略。
2. why, would rather, had better, may as well, cannot (help / choose) but等后须跟省to的不定式。
3. 介词but, except等前若有行为动词do, 其后常用省to的不定式作宾语；若没有行为动词do, 则用带to的不定式。
4. 不定式作表语时，若主语中有行为动词do 的某一形式时，不定式的to可有可无。
例1： It was a pity that the famous painter died ______ his painting unfinished.
A. of B. from
C. out D. with
【解析】选D。本题考查with复合结构充当状语的用法，不是词组die of…， die from…和die out。
with复合结构
例2：With his mother ______ him, he is getting on well with his work.
A. help B. to help
C. helping D. helped
【解析】选C。这是with的复合结构， his mother与help是逻辑上的主谓关系，所以排除D, 如选B则有将来的意思，显然不合语境，选C表示“他妈一直在帮他”， 正合句意。
with 复合结构在句中一般作状语和定语，常见形式有：
1．“with+名词/代词+介词短语”。
The man was walking on the street, with a book under his arm.
2. “with+名词/代词+形容词”。
He likes to sleep with the door open.
3. “with+名词/代词+副词”。
The square looks more beautiful with all the lights on.
4. “with+名词/代词+名词”。
He left home, with his wife a hopeless soul.
5. “with+名词/代词+done”。在此结构中，过去分词和宾语是被动关系，表示动作已经完成。
With the problem solved, he went out to play.
6. “with+名词/代词+ ing分词”。此结构强调名词是 ing分词的动作的发出者或某动作、状态正在进行。
He felt more uneasy with the whole class staring at him.
7. “with+宾语+to do”。此结构中，不定式和宾语是被动关系，表示尚未发生的动作。
With nothing to do, I'll go out for a walk in the park.2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义（35份）2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义名词性从句
1. Before a problem can be solved, it must be obvious ______ the problem itself is. (2011·湖南卷31)
A. what B. that
C. which D. why
【解析】选A。空白处后句子缺表语。因此不能选B。B中的that 只起引导作用，无实意。而该句选what既起了引导作用，又作了句子成分表语。
2. It is still under discussion ______ the old bus station should be replaced with a modern hotel or not. (2011·重庆卷22)
A. whether B. when
C. which D. where
【解析】选A。该句中it作形式主语，真正的主语是由whether…or not引导的从句。句意：是否这个旧车站该由现代宾馆取代还在讨论中。
考点1.名词性从句的种类及连接词
I want to be liked and loved for______I am inside.
A. who B. where
C. what D. how
【解析】选C。what 引导的宾语从句作for 的宾语， what在从句中作am的表语。
名词性从句具有名词的功能，分为主语从句、宾语从句、表语从句和同位语从句四种。它由以下三种连接词引导：
1. 连词： that, whether, if。
2. 连接代词： who, whom, whose, which, what等。
3. 连接副词： when, where, why, how等
Keep in mind ______ you want others to respect you, you must respect others first.
A. that when B. that if
C. if when D. when if
【解析】选B。that引导一个宾语从句，宾语从句中又有一个由if引导的条件状语从句。
1. that引导名词性从句时既无词义也不在从句中作任何成分。
2. that引导主语从句、表语从句、同位语从句时一般不可省，引导宾语从句时常可省。但是， and连接两个由that引导的宾语从句时，第一个that可省，第二个that不可省。
3. that从句一般不作介词的宾语。但： in that “因为”， except / but that“除了”例外。
考点3.whether, if的用法
It's reported that Pakistan is considering ______ to continue its information cooperation with the US because the US didn't inform them in advance before they took action to kill Bin Laden. (2011·成都七中高三最后一套模拟卷)
A. what B. how C. whether D. if
【解析】选C。在 whether后只能用不定式或后接or not，不能接if，即whether to do 或whether or not。
whether, if引导名词性从句时，表示“是否”， 不在从句中作任何成分，二者常可通用，但在下面几种情况下一般只用whether:
(1)引导主语从句。
(2)引导表语从句。
(3)引导同位语从句。
(4)在动词discuss之后。
(5)在介词之后。
(6)后面紧跟or not。
(7)动词不定式前。
考点4.名词性从句的语序
I really wonder ______ will stop Japan from its annual whale hunt in the Antarctic. (山西太原五中2010— 2011学年度第二学期月考4月)
A. that it is what B. what it is that
C. what is it that D. that is it what
【解析】选B。空白处为一宾语从句作动词wonder的宾语。而宾语从句是一个强调句，强调what。宾语从句要采用陈述语序。
名词性从句用陈述语序，为：连词(+被修饰语)+主语+谓语。即主谓不倒装。
考点5. what与that引导名词性从句的区别
例1：It is not always easy for the public to see ______ use a new invention can be of to human life. (2011·重庆卷34)
A. Whose B. what
C. which D. that
【解析】选B。空白处作动词 see 的宾语。宾语从句按顺序为a new invention can be of what use to human life，疑问词what前置。因此选B。
例2：Modern science has given clear evidence ______ smoking can lead to many diseases. (2011·天津卷13)
A. what B. which
C. that D. where
【解析】选C。that引导词作名词evidence的同位语从句引导词。该词只起引导作用，无实义，不可省略。
1. 在名词性从句中，that只起连接主句和从句的作用，在从句中不充当任何成分，本身也没有词义，即从句中不缺少任何成分时用连词that.
2. that在从句中作主语时通常用it作形式主语，而将that从句置于句末作真正的主语。但what不能用it作形式主语。
3. that可引导同位语从句，但what不能。
考点6.由reason作主语时，表语从句的连接词
The reason why he can't go to school is ______ he is ill.
A. because B. why
C. that D. which
【解析】选C。reason作主语时，其后的表语从句一般用连词that。
reason作主语时，表语从句所用连词为that, 一般不用because或why等。
考点7. that引导同位语从句和定语从句的区别
例1：______ was known to all that William had broken his promise ______ he would never play computer games again. (2011·湖南雅礼中学高三第8次月考卷)
A. As; which B. As; that
C. It; that D. What; that
【解析】选C。it作形式主语，第一个that后引导从句作真正主语。名词promise后接that引导的同位语从句。对前一名词内容进一步补充说明。
例2：Helping others is a habit, one ______ you can learn even at an early age. (2011·山东卷改编)
A. it B. that C. what D. who
【解析】选B。one是a habit的同位语。作为定语从句的先行词，后用which或 that作定语从句动词learn的宾语。关系代词作宾语也可省略。
that引导同位语从句时， that在从句中不作成分(一般不省), 且不可用which来取代；that引导定语从句时， that须作主语、宾语或表语(作宾语时常可省), 且常可用which来取代。2012届高考英语语法专题复习讲义荟萃状语从句
( )1. ________ you show any fear，the tiger will attack you.
A．Once B．Until C．Till D．While
( )2. The master will not attend our meeting ________ he________ free.
A．if; will be B．if; is C．unless; shall be D．unless; is
( )3. Those who have problems in real marriage would look for other ways to evade (逃避) their families，________ there was no web marriage.
A．as if B．only when
C．even if D．in which
( )4.________ I could write down the number of the bus，the bus had run away.
A．Before B．Unless
C．Until D．Once
( )5. She had to go back to the room ________she had left her handbag there.
A．unless B．until C．because D．where
( )6. Shall we go outing ________ fine tomorrow
A．unless it is B．if it will be C．if it is D．whether it is
( )10. Questions about her divorce follow ________she goes.
A．where B．whenever C．whatever D．wherever
( )11. You may borrow this book ________ you promise to give it back.
A．in case B．so long as C．as if D．even if
( )12. ________the days went on，the situation there got worse.
A．With B．Since C．While D．As
( )13. ________ the man grew older，he lost interest in everything except gardening.
A．With B．Since C．While D．As
( )14. ________ everybody is here，let’s set out right away.
A．Now that B．Because C．For D．After
( )15. ________ you understand this rule，you’ll have no further difficulty.
A．Once B．Unless C．As D．Until
( )16. ________I know，they will go to London to watch the Olympic Games in 2012.
A．Since B．So far as C．In case D．As if
( )17. I had no sooner got back to the kitchen ________ the doorbell rang loud enough to wake the dead.
A．when B．than C．as D．while
( )18. You should put the dictionary________ you can find it easily.
A．where B．the place C．the place on which D．what
( )19. I criticized him，you know，not ________ I hate him but ________ I love him.
A．because; because B．because; for
C．for; because D．for; for
( )20. She said to me，“I’ll tell you the result of test ________ I know it.”
A．because B．the moment
C．after D．though
参考答案
1. A 该空表示“一旦……”，应填once引导条件状语从句。
2. D unless引导条件状语从句时应用一般现在时代替一般将来时。
3. C even if表示“即使”，引导让步状语从句。
4. A 该空表示“尚未来得及”，应填before引导时间状语从句。
5. C 该空表因果关系，应填because 引导原因状语从句。从句中有作地点状语的 “there”因此不能选D。
6. C 条件状语从句应用一般现在时代替一般将来时。
7. A 该空表示“当……的时候”，应填when引导时间状语从句。
8. C as表示“尽管”引导让步状语从句时应采用倒装结构。
9. B 该空表示“除非”，应填unless引导条件状语从句。
14. A now (that) 在此表示原因，意为“既然，由于”；because表示对方不知道的原因；for 表示原因时，是并列连词，应放在后面。
15. A once意为“一旦”。句意：一旦明白了这条规则，就再也没有困难了。
16. B so far as I know意为“据我所知”。
17. B no sooner…than意为“一……就”，相当于as soon as。句意：我一走回厨房，门铃又响了，响得足以把死人吵醒。类似用法还有hardly/scarcely…when。
18. A 此处where引导地点状语从句。
19. A for不能与not…but这一结构连用。句意：我批评他不是因为我恨他，而是因为我爱他。
20. B the moment意为“一……就”，相当于as soon as。类似用法的连词还有： the minute/ instant; instantly/ immediately/ directly等2012届高考英语语法专题复习单项选择详解试题
1.-----The film is, I have to say, not a bit interesting.
------Why It’s ______ than the films I have ever seen.
A. far more interesting B. much less interesting
C. no more interesting D. any less interesting
答案与解析：not a bit 一点儿都不。根据句中的than可知，此处应用形容词的比较级，而interesting为多音节词，比较级在前面加 more，如表示比较程度，则在其前面加far。选A项。
2.—How is your recent trip to Sichuan
—I’ve never had __________one before.
A. a pleasant B. a more pleasant
C. a most pleasant D. the most pleasant答案与解析：本题考查形容词比较级的用法。否定词加比较级往往表示最高级的概念。句意为：你的四川之行怎么样？——再好不过了。选B。
3. Mr. Stevenson is great to work for----I really couldn't ask for a _____ boss.
A. better B. good C. best D. still better答案与解析：本题考查比较级用法。“cannot/couldn’t ...+比较级”表示最高级含义。根据前半句可知，Stevenson是一个不错的老板，因此说“因此找不到比他更好的老板了”，表示他是最好的老板。
4.The new stadium being built for the next Asian Games will be_________the present one。
A. as three times big as B. three times as big as
C. as big as three times D. as big three times as答案与解析：本题考查同级比较及其修饰语的位置关系。英语中，如果比较级有自己的修饰词语，应当是“修饰词语（数量词或副词）+as (so)...as...”或“修饰词+比较级”。
5.She has tried her best. Please don’t be too ______ about her job.
A. special B．responsible C. unusual D. particular
答案与解析：句意为：她已经尽力了，别对她的工作太挑剔。special特殊的；responsible负责人的；unusual不同寻常的。be too particular about 对……太挑剔（讲究），符合句意，答案为D项。
6. The old engineer’s eyes still shone bright in the wrinkled brown face and his step as he came across the room was________，though slow.
A. shaky B. heavy C. casual D. steady
答案与解析：根据句意可知，老工程师的步伐虽然缓慢但是“沉稳”。shaky颤抖的；heavy沉重的；casual非正式的，漫不经心的；均不符合句意。
7. An unhappy childhood may have some negative effects on a person’s characters however, they are not always_________.
A. practical B. avoidable
C. permanent D. beneficial
答案与解析：句意：不幸的童年可能对人的性格有些负面影响，但是这些影响不总是……。填入的内容应该和前半部分形成转折意义，permanent（永久的）符合句意。practical切合实际的；avoidable可避免的；beneficial有利的。
8. The state-run company is required to make its accounts as_________ as possible for its staff to monitor the use of money.
A. transparent B. reasonable C. securer D. format
答案与解析：句意：国有企业被要求把账目尽量……以便让员工监督资金的使用情况。从目的状语判断，只有账目transparent（透明的）才有利于监督。reasonable合理的；secure安全的；formal正式的；均不符合题意。
9. In that school, English is compulsory for all students, but French and Russian are _________.
A．special B．regional
C．optional D．original
答案与解析：根据句意和句中的compulsory（强制的）可知，应选择和它的词义相对的optional（可选择的），其他选项均不符合题意。
10. The professor could tell by the _______look in Maris's eyes that she didn’t understand a single word of his lecture.
A. cold B. blank C. innocent D. fresh
答案与解析：本题考查形容词辨析。语意：那个教授从Maria茫然的眼神中看出他的讲座她一个字也听不懂。blank在句中表示“茫然的，不理解的”。
11. My schedule is very _____right now, but I'll try to fit you in.
A. tight B. short C. regular D. flexible
答案与解析：根据语意“我的安排很紧……”可知，这里选tight表示“紧的”。short短的；regular 有规律的；flexible灵活的；都不符合句意。
12. 30.Nowedays,_____________increase in children’s creativity, for they are greatly encouraged to develop their talents.
A. sharp B. slight C. natural D. modest
答案与解析：当今，孩子的创造力急剧提高，因为他们被鼓励去发展个人才能。sharp急剧的；slight轻微的；natural自然而然的；modest谦虚的。从句中的因果关系看，sharp符合题意。
13. It is one thing to enjoy listening to good music, but it is ______another to play it well yourself.
A. quite B. very C. rather D. much
答案与解析：本题考查副词及其搭配。句意为：喜欢听好音乐是一回事，但你眼中得好完全是另外一回事。quite another表示“完全不同”。
14. I've been writing this report ____for the last two weeks, but it has to be handed it tomorrow.
A. finally B. immediately C. occasionally D. certainly
答案与解析：本题考查副词辨析。根据语意“这两个星期来我偶尔写写这个报告，但明天必须上交”判断，这里用occasionally（偶尔）符合语境。finally最终；immediately立即；certainly当然；不符合语意。
15. To be great, you proper must be smart, confident, and, ______, honest.
A. therefore B. above all C. however D. after all
答案与解析：本题考查副词辨析。句意为：要想优秀，你必须聪明自信，更重要的是诚实。above all首先，最重要的是，符合句意。therefore因此，于是；however然而；after all 毕竟。
16. _____, I managed to get through the game and the pain was worth it in the end.
A. Hopefully B. Normally C. Thankfully D. Conveniently
答案与解析：本题考查副词辨析。根据句中“manage to do”可知事情已经办成功了，从语气上判断，Thankfully（幸亏，表示高兴或宽慰）最贴切
17.On the next birthday, Ann___________married for twenty years.
A. is B. has been C. will be D. will have been
答案与解析：选D。根据句意可知，动作在将来某一时刻（她下一个生日时）会完成，故用将来完成时。
18. In the last few years, thousands of films __________all over the world.
A. have produced B. have been produced
C. are producing D. are being produced
答案与解析：选B。根据前面的时间状语in the last few years可知，应用现在完成时，且film和produce之间是动宾关系，故用现在完成时的被动语态。
19.We hurried to work in the morning and found that somebody _____ into the office during the night.
A. broke B. had broken
C. has broken D. was breaking
答案与解析：选B。空格处的动作发生在found之前，故用过去完成时。句意：早晨我们来上班，发现有人晚上闯入过办公室。
20. She was surprised to find the fridge empty; the child _____ everything!
A. had been eating B. had eaten C. have eaten D. have been eating
答案与解析：选B。考查时态。第一句是一个过去的语境，而第二句则表示在一句的动作发生之前已经完成的一个动作，所以要用过去完成时态。
21. —That must have been a long trip.
—Yeah, it ___________us a whole week to get there.
A. takes B. has taken C. took D. was taking
答案与解析：选C。考查时态，题干中must have done是对过去的肯定推测，因此提示时间在过去，选择一般过去时。
22. Experiments of this kind ______________in both the U.S. and Europe well before the Second World War.
A. have conducted B. have been conducted
C. had conducted D. had been conducted
答案与解析：选D。考查时态和语态，首先考虑语态，主语experiment与位于conduct构成动宾关系，谓语使用被动形式。题干中出现the second war是过去的时间点，before the second war是过去的过去，因此使用过去完成时。
23.Look at the pride on Tom’s face. He___________to have been praised by the manager just now.
A. seemed B. seems C. had seemed D. is seeming
答案与解析：选B。根据第一句的内容可知，叙述的是现在的情况，此处seem表示“似乎”，是系动词，不用于进行时，排除D项选B项。
24. —Bob has gone to California.
—Oh, can you tell me when he ____________
A. has left B. left C. is leaving D. would leave
答案与解析：选B。考查时态，时态Bob已经去了加利福尼亚，说你他离开的动作发生在过去，因此使用一般过去时。
25. All visitors to this village _________ with kindness.
A. treat B. are treated C. are treating D. had been treated
答案与解析：选B。句子的主语all visitors是动词treat的承受者，构成逻辑上的动宾关系，所以用被动语态。此处介绍的是一般事实，故用一般现在时。
26.Tom___________in the library every night over the last three months.
A. works B. worked C. have been working D. had been working
答案与解析：选C。题干中出现明显的over the last three months，用于现在完成进行时或现在完成时。
27.—What a mistake!
—Yes. I ___________his doing it another way, but without success.
A. was suggesting B. will suggest C. would suggest D. had suggested
答案与解析：选D。过去完成时表示在过去某一个动作之前已经发生或者完成的动作。根据句意，“建议”这一动作发生在“犯错误”之前，用过去完成时。
28. That price of music sounds quite familiar. Who _________the piano upstairs
A. has played B. played C. plays D. is playing
答案与解析：选D。第一句提到，那首乐曲听起来非常熟悉，因此可知楼上有人“正在”弹奏钢琴，用现在进行时。
29. His first novel________good reviews since it came out last month.
A. receives B. is receiving C. will receive D. has received
答案与解析：选D。since引导的时间状语从句用一般过去时，其主句用现在完成时，故选择D项。
30.Last month, the Japanese government expressed their thanks for the aid they___________From China.
A. receive B. are receiving C. have received D. had received
答案与解析：选D。时间状语为last month，且受到帮助应该在表达感谢之前，表示“过去的过去”，用过去完成时。
31. I'll go to the library as soon as I finish what I __________.
A. was doing B. am doing C. have done D. had been doing
答案与解析：选B。句意为：我一做完正在做的事情就去图书馆。由此可知事情正在做，用现在进行时。
32. By the time Jack returned home from England, his son. _______from college.
A. graduated B. has graduated
C. had been D. had graduated
答案与解析：选D。by the time（到……时候）引导时间状语从句，如果从句的谓语为一般过去时，主句的谓语为过去完成时。
33.----Joan, what ______ in your hand
-----Look! It’s a birthday gift for my grandma.
A. had you held B. are you holding C. do you hold D. will you hold
答案与解析：选B。根据答语中的look可知，“拿”的动作正在进行，故用现在进行时。句意：——Joan， 你手里拿的是什么？——看看，这是我给奶奶买的生日礼物。
34------I hear you ____ in a pub. What’s it like
------Well, it’s very hand work and I’m always tired, but I don’t mind.
A. are working B. will work C. were working D. will be working
答案与解析：选A。根据答语it’s very hand work and I’m always tired可知，答话人现阶段正在一家酒馆上班，因此用现在进行时。
35．-----Tommy is planning to buy a car.
----I know .By next month ,he __ enough for a used one.
A. saves B．saved C. will save D. will have saved
答案与解析：选D。根据句中的时间状语by next month可知，到下个月他将会积赚足够的钱，因此应用将来完成时。
36.Planning so far ahead ___________no sense-so many things will have changed by next year.
A. made B. is making C. makes D. has made
答案与解析：选C。此题翻译为“那么提前的计划没有意义——如此多的事情到明年会发生改变。”此题中so far修饰ahead，表示“那么”。make no sense对是表示主语planning的客观描述。此题容易误选为D。学生误以为so far在这里是到目前为止的意思。所以答案为C。
37.I wasn’t sure if he was really interested or if he___________polite.
A. was just being B. will just be C. had just been D. would just be
答案与解析：选A。此题翻译为“我不确定是否他真的感兴趣，或者是否只是出于礼貌。”从前面的wasn’t判断整句话的动作应该发生在过去，排除B。C项是过去完成时，需要发生在过去的过去。D项是过去将来时，要立足过去，着眼未来。此题“出于礼貌”和“感兴趣”两动作同时发生，而说话人要强调“当时”的概念，所以答案为A，过去进行时。
38．When Alice came to, she did not know how long she___________there.
A. had been lying B. has been lying C. was lying D. has lain
答案与解析：选A。此题考查时态知识。翻译为“当Alice进来的时候，她不知道已经在这里躺多久了。”通过含义可以发现，“躺”这个动作发生在came之前，发生在过去的过去，应该用过去完成时。又因为作者强调“一直”这个概念，故答案为A，过去完成进行时。
39.The manager was worried about the press conference his assistant _____in his place but ,luckily ,everything was going on smoothly.
A. gave B. gives C. was giving D. had given
答案与解析：选C。从语意“经理很担心现在助手正替代他参加的新闻发布会……”可知give的动作和was worried的动作是同时进行的，根据语意用过去进行时。
40. In 1942 Columbus_______ on the of the Bahama islands, but he mistook it for an island off India.
A. lands B. landed C. has landed D. had landed
答案与解析：选B。根据前面的时间状语in 1492可知，此处应用一般过去时态。
41. It is the most instructive lecture that I ________since I carne to this school.
A. attended B. had attended C. am attending D. have attended
答案与解析：选D。根据后面的时间状语since I came to this school可知，此处应用现在完成时态。句意：这是我到这个学校以来听过的最有教育意义的演讲。
42. In the near future, more advances in the robot technology ______ by scientists.
A．are making B. are made C. will make D. will be make
答案与解析：选D。根据时间状语in the near future可知，此处应用一般将来时。make和more advances之间是动宾关系，故用被动语态。
43. — What do you think of store shopping in the future
—Personally, I think it will exist along with home shopping but _____.
A. will never replace B. would never replace
C. will never be replaced D. would never be replaced
答案与解析：选C。 答话人认为商店购物与家庭购物并存，但是永远不会被取代。it与replace之间是被动关系，再结合本句的时态will exist可知，此处应用一般将来时的被动语态。
44. —I didn’t ask for the name list. Why ______on my desk
—I put it there just now in case you needed it.
A. does it land B. has it landed
C. will it land D. had it landed
答案与解析：选B。问话人质疑的是名单为什么在自己的书桌上，此处强调的是对现在造成的结果或者影响，所以用现在完成时。
45.When I got on the bus, I_____ I had left my wallet at home.
A. was realizing B. realized C. have realized D. would realize
答案与解析：选B。 考查时态。 When引导时间状语从句，表示的是过去某一时刻，所以用一般过去时态。2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义必备句型全归纳
1.as soon as…一…就…= directly / immediately / instantly…
= the second / the minute / the moment / the instant…
Eg. He came around to see me as soon as / the moment/ immediately he checked in the hotel.
他刚一入住宾馆就来看我.
They informed us the news immediately / directly they got it.
他们一得到消息就通知了我们.
The policeman came to the spot the moment / the instant / the minute she heard of the accident.一听说事故,这位警察就到了现场.
2.….before….
(1). 没来得及…就…
The roof fell before he had time to dash into the room to save his baby.
他还没有来得及冲进房间把孩子就出来,房顶就塌了.
He ran off before I could stop him.
To my great disappointment , my favorite singer left the concert before I could have a word with him.
(2).过了多久才怎么样,动作进行到什么程度才怎样
They walked about thirty miles to the west before they saw a village.
They worked day and night about three days before everything returned to normal.
Three years passed before I knew it.
3.It was + 时间段 + before….过了多久才…. ;
It was not long before… 不久就…
It will ( not ) be + 时间段 + before …要过多久 ( 不久)…..才…..
Eg. It was not long before he sensed the danger of the position.
It was three years before he came back.
It will be half a year before you graduate from this school.
4. no sooner …than…= hardly…when…一…就…., 刚刚…就…
No sooner / hardly + 过去完成时,than / when + 一般过去时
如果no sooner, hardly 位于句首, 主句要倒装.
He had hardly sat down to have a rest when the door bell rang and in came Allan.
No sooner had he got off the train than his daughter ran towards him.
Hardly had we arrived when she started crying to go home.
5. once 一旦…., 表示时间和条件
Once you understand this rule, you will have no further difficulty.
Once you have decided to do something, you should do it well.
Once you enter the chemistry lab, you should follow the teacher’s instructions.
6. since … 自从….以来
Since 引导的从句不论是延续性或非延续性动词, 都表示的是动作或状态的完成或结束.
注意一下句子翻译:
Since he lived in Nanjing, I have not heard from him. (= since he left Nanjing…)
自从他离开南京以来,我没有收到过他的信.
Since she was in Yangzhou, she has kept in touch with her former friends. ( since she left Yangzhou…)
她离开扬州以来,一直同过去的朋友保持着联系.
对比:
1). I have never seen him since he was ill.
他病好后,我就再也没有见到他.
2). I have never seen him since he fell ill.
他生病以后我就再也没有见过他.
It is / ( has been ) + 时间段 + since + 过去式
It is / has been two years since his father died.
= his father has been dead for two years. = his father died two years ago.
他的父亲去世两年了.
It has been 8 years since I graduated from university.
= I graduated from university 8 years ago.
It is 3 years since he smoked. 他三年不吸烟了.(即,从句动词延续性的,译成否定意义;从句动词非延续性的,译成肯定意义.)
It is 3 years since he left school.-----他毕业三年了.
7….until…直到…时候; not…until…直到…才…
You are to stay here until / till your mother comes back.
The meeting was put off until ten o’clock.
Not until we watched the Earth Day program on TV did we know much about global warning.
= We did not know much about global warning until we watched the Earth Day program.
= It was not until we watched the Earth Day program on TV that we knew much about global warming.
Not until he failed in the exam did he realize that he had wasted much time playing computer games.
8. …when…引导并列分句, “当时,突然”,强调另一动作的突然发生.
One day Chuck was on a flight across the Pacific Ocean when suddenly his plane crashed. Chuck survived the crash and landed on a deserted island.
I was walking along the river when I heard a drowning boy crying for help.
I was about to leave when it began to rain.
对比: A: I was walking along the street when I caught sight of a tailor’s shop.
B: I was walking along the streets. Just at that moment I caught sight of a tailor’s shop.
9. while = although尽管
While I admit that the problem is difficult, I don’t think that it can’t be solved.
While I admit his good points, I can see his shortcomings.
While I was angry with her, I didn’t lose my temper.
10. where 地点状语
You should put the book where it was.
Persistent people begin their success where others end in failure.
Where there is a will, there is a way.
Where men are greedy, there is never peace.
Go where you should, keep on studying.
11. as 引导的行为方式状语从句.
Please do exactly as your doctor says.
You must do the exercises just as I show you
As it is = as things are照现在的情形看
He promised to study hard, but as it is , he does no better than before.
Leave the house as it is. I’d like to buy it as it is.
12. as if ( as though ) 好像
He looked at me as if I were mad.
He was in great trouble, but he acted if / though nothing had happened.
Although they just met for the first time, they talked as if they had been friends for many years.
There many black clouds in the sky. It looks as if it is going to rain.
13. though, although, as “虽然”, 引导让步状语从句.
Although位于句首; though 位于句首或句中;as位于句中= though = that, 它的词序是把句中强调的形容词,副词,动词或名词放在连词前. 注意观察下列句式变化:
Although / Though I’m young, I already know what career I want to follow.
= Young as / though / that I am, I already know what career I want to follow.
Although I respect him very much, I can not agree with his idea.
= Much as / that / though I respect him, I can not agree with his idea.
Although / though he is a child, he knows a lot of Chinese characters.
= Child as / though / that he is , he knows a lot of Chinese characters.
Although he tried, he couldn’t solve the problem.
= Try as he might, he couldn’t solve the problem.
Although it is raining, I am going out for a walk.
= Raining as it is, I am going out for a walk.
14. even if = even though 即使…也…; 即便…也…
Even if / though I have to sell my house, I’ll keep my business going.
She won’t attend such parties even though/ if she is invited.
You are not stupid. Even though/ if you were slow in study, you shouldn’t give up studies.
The boy was badly injured and died at last. Even if he had been attended without delay,
he couldn’t have been saved.
15. whether… or…不管…还是…
Whether the weather is good or bad, they will set off as they planned.
Whether he drives or takes the train, he will be here on time.
Any person, whether young or old, has his worth, independent of achievements, bank accounts or looks.
16. 疑问词+ ever
Whatever ,whoever, whichever, whenever, wherever, whoever均引导让步状语从句,相当于no matter 与what, who, which, when, where, how连用.
Whatever ( = No matter what ) may happen, we shall not lose hope.
Whoever / No matter who comes, he will be welcome.
Whenever / No matter when it happened, it was certainly not yesterday.
Wherever / No matter where he went, he made friends with people.
17. unless 除非,如果不 (= if…not)
I shall go tomorrow unless it rains.
------Shall Tom go and play football
------Not unless he has finished his homework.
Unless the sun were to rise in the west, I wouldn’t break my word.
I won’t attend his birthday party unless invited (= unless I am invited)2012届高考英语语法专题复习定语从句特例
引导非限制性定语从句，当先行词是一个单词或词组时，我们只用which引导，不用as引导。例如：
1、Beijing, which will hold the 2008 Olympic games, is becoming more and more beautiful.
但当代替的是主句的全部内容时，区别如下：
一，As引导的非限制性从句可置于主句之前，之中或之后，而which引导的非限制性定语从句只能放在主句之后。例如：
1，As we know, the earth goes around the sun.
2, The earth goes around the sun., as we know.
3,The earth, as we know, goes around the sun .
4, The earth goes around the sun, which makes us get enough sunlight.
二，As引导的从句有“正如…… ，正像…… ，之意，而which引导的从句则没有此意，因此，当主从句语意一致时，只用as引导,不用which引导。常用句式有：as anybody can see, as we expected, as we know, as is often the case, as we hoped，as often happens 等 例如：
1,He is a kind man, as has been said above .
2,She has married again, as was expected.
3, She has married again, which was unexpected .
三，As作从句主语，而且从句为被动语态，此时不用which引导；若从句为主动语态，一般用which引导。例如：
1，Their team won the game again , as was reported.
2,Tom has made great progress, which delighted us .
As作此种用法时，常用的句式有：as is known to us all, as is said above, as is announced,
As was reported, as is mentioned above ,as is reported, as is expected, as is discussed 等。
四，Which引导的非限制性定语从句指代整个主句内容时，从句的谓语带有宾语，有的还带有宾语补足语。此时Which无词义,只是代表主句的意思,可以译为"这件事","这一点";而As可以译为"正如……"。例如下面这些句子中的which就不能替换为as 。
1，I shall never forget those years when I lived in the country with the farmers, which has a great effect on my life.
2, Bamboo is hollow, which makes it very light .
3.Tom made rapid progress at school, aswhich pleased his parents a lot .×
五,As引导的非限制性定语从句常表示主动，而which引导的非限制性定语从句常表示被动。例如：
1，He says he has a lot of money, which isn t true .
2, He has a lot of money, as he says .
另外as引导限制性定语从句时，主要与the same, such等连用。例如：
1，Let children read such books as will make them better and wiser.让孩子们读那些能使 变得更好更聪明的书。
2, This is the same book as was bought in the bookstore yesterday.
As与such结合引导限制性定语从句时，要注意和such……that……引导的结果状语从句区分开。例如：
1，He gets such a good book as we all want to read first.
2, He gets such a good book that we all want to read it first .
3.Only such things ______ can be proved can be regarde as facts .
在第一句中，as作为read的宾语，as引导的是定语从句，而在第二句中，that引导的是结果状语从句，read必须跟it宾语；而在第三句中指代事物的先行词前虽然有only， 但此处only并不是直接修饰things，而且也不是“唯一”的意思。此题考察固定结构such…as，故空格处应该填上as 。
作为高中生，掌握了as和which这些基本用法，并加以适当的练习，定能以不变应万变了。2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义介词全归纳
上午、晚要用in，at黎明、午夜、点与分。
年、月、年月、季节、周，阳光、灯、影、衣、冒in。
将来时态in...以后，小处at大处in。
有形with无形by，语言、单位、材料in。
特征、方面与方式，心情成语惯用in。
介词at和to表方向，攻击、位置、恶、善分。
日子、日期、年月日，星期加上早、午、晚，
收音、农场、值日on，关于、基础、靠、著论。
着、罢、出售、偷、公、假，故意、支付、相反，准。
特定时日和"一……就"，on后常接动名词。
年、月、日加早、午、晚，of之前on代in。
步行、驴、马、玩笑on，cab，carriage则用in。
at山脚、门口、在当前，速、温、日落、价、核心。
工具、和、同随with，具有、独立、就、原因。
就……来说宾译主，对、有、方状、表细分。
海、陆、空、车、偶、被by，单数、人类know to man。
this、that、tomorrow，yesterday，next、last、one。
接年、月、季、星期、周，介词省略已习惯。
over、under正上下，above、below则不然，
若与数量词连用，混合使用亦无关。'
beyond超出、无、不能，against靠着，对与反。
besides，except分内外，among之内along沿。
同类比较except，加for异类记心间。
原状because of,、 owing to、 due to表语形容词
under后接修、建中，of、from物、化分。
before、after表一点, ago、later表一段。
before能接完成时，ago过去极有限。
since以来during间，since时态多变换。
与之相比beside，除了last but one。
复不定for、找、价、原，对、给、段、去、为、作、赞。
快到、对、向towards，工、学、军、城、北、上、南。
but for否定用虚拟，复合介词待后言。
ing型由于鉴，除了除外与包合。 之后、关于、在......方面，有关介词须记全。
in内to外表位置，山、水、国界to在前。
如大体掌握如上介调用法口诀，就不易出错。下面对该口诀分别举例帮助你理解消化。
早、午、晚要用in
例：in the morning 在早上
in the afternoon 在下午
in the evening 在晚上
in the day 在白天
at黎明、午、夜、点与分
例: at dawn, at daybreak 在黎明时候
at noon 在中午
at night 在夜间
at midnight 在午夜
以上短语都不用冠词
at six o'clock 在6点钟
at 7：30 (seven thirty) 在7点半
at half past eleven 在11点半
at nine fifteen 在9点15分
at ten thirty a.m. 在上午10点30分
也可以写成
seven to five 5点差7分(半小时以上)
five minutes after two 2点过5分
at a quarter to two 1点45分
at the weekend 在周末
年、月、年月、季节、周
即在"来年"，在"某月"，在"某年某月" (但在某年某月某
日则用on)，在四季，在第几周等都要用in。
例；in 1986 在1986年
in 1927 在1927年
in April 在四月
in March 在三月
in December 1986 1986年12月
in July l983 1983年7月
in spring 在春季 in summer 在夏季
in autumn 在秋季 in winter 在冬季
in the fist week of this semester 这学期的第一周
in the third week 在第三周
阳光、灯、影、衣、冒 in，
即在阳光下，在灯下，在树阴下，穿衣、着装、冒雨等都要用in。
例：Don't read in dim light. 切勿在暗淡的灯光下看书。
They are reviewing their lessons in the bright light. 他们在明亮的灯光下复习功课。
They are sitting in the shade of a tree. 他们坐在树阴下乘凉。
a prisoner in irons 带着镣铐的囚犯
He went in the rain to meet me at the station. 他冒雨到车站去接我。
The poor dressed (clothed) in rags in old society. 旧社会穷人们衣衫褴褛．
以及：in the bright sunlight 在明亮的阳光下
a merchant in disguise 乔装的商人
the woman in white (black, red, yellow) 穿着白(黑、红、黄)色衣服的妇女
in uniform 穿着制服
in mourning 穿着丧服
in brown shoes 穿着棕色鞋
in his shirt sleeves 穿着衬衫
将来时态in...以后
例: They will come back in 10 days. 他们将10天以后回来。
I'll come round in a day or two. 我一两天就回来。
We'll be back in no time. 我们一会儿就回来。
Come and see me in two days' time. 两天后来看我。(从现在开始)
after... (从过去开始)
小处at大处in
例：Li and I arrived at Heishan county safe and sound, all is well. Don't worry. 李和我平安地到达黑山县，一切很好，勿念。
I live in a great city (big city), my sister lives at a small town while my parents live at a village. 我住在大城市，我姐姐住在一个小城镇，而我的父母则住在农村。
I'm in Liaoning, at Anshan. 我住在辽宁省鞍山市．
有形with无形by，语言 、单位、材料in
例：The workers are paving a road with stone. 工人们正用石子铺路。(有形)
The teacher is correcting the paper with a new pen. 这位教师正用一支新笔批改论文。(有形)
"Taking Tiger Mountain by Strategy" is a good opera. <<智取威虎山>>是-出好戏。(无形)
The product is separated by distilation into gasoline and gas oil. 这种产品是用蒸馏分离出气油和粗柴油。 (表示方式、手段、方法--无形)
I really can't express my idea in English freely in-deed． 我确实不能用英语流利地表达我的思想。 (表示某种语言用in)
I wrote a novel in Russian. 我用俄语写了一本小说。(同上)
The kilometer is the biggest unit of length in the metric system． 公里是米制中最长的长度单位。 (表示度、量、衡单位的用in )
The length is measured in meter, kilometre, and centimetre. 长度是以米、公里、厘米为单位来计算的。(同上)
This board was cast in bronze not in gold. 这个牌匾是铜铸的，不是金铸的。
特征、方面与方式、心情、成语惯用in
特征或状态：
例: The Democratic Party was then in power. 那时民主党执政。
They found the patient in a coma. 他们发现病人处于昏迷状态。
He has not been in good health for some years. 他几年来身体一直不好。
Many who came in despair went away in hope. 许多人带着绝望情绪而来，却满怀希望而去。
The house was in ruins. 这房屋成了废墟。
The poor girl was in tears. 这个贫苦女孩泪流满面。
Her clothes were in rags. 她的衣跟穿破了。
His shoes were in holes. 他的鞋穿出窟窿了。
I only said it in fun. 我说这话只是开玩笑的。
She spoke in grief rather than in anger. 与其说她讲得很气愤，不如说她讲得很伤心。
还有一些短语也用in，如：
in jest 诙谐地，in joke 开玩笑地，in spite 恶意地， in fairness 公正地，in revenge 报复, in mercy 宽大，in sorrow 伤心地等。
His mind was in great confusion. 他脑子里很乱。
Today everybody is in high spirits and no one is in low ebb. 今天大家都兴高采烈，没有一个情绪低落。
She and her classmates are in flower ages. 她和她的同学都正值妙龄。
The compaign was in full swing. 运动正值高潮中。
方面：
例：we accepted the item in principle. 我们在原则上接受了这个条款。
They are never backward in giving their views. 他们从来不怕发表自己的意见。
The backward area has achieved self-sufficient in grain. 这个落后的地区在粮食方面已能自给。
A good teacher must be an example in study. 一个好的教师必须是学习的模范。
方式：
例：All the speeches were taken down in shorthand. 所有报告都用速记记录下来了。
The Party has always educated us in the spirit of patriotism and internationalism. 党一贯以爱国主义和国际主义精神教育我们。
如下成语惯用in
例如： in all 总计
in advance 事前
in the meantime 与此同时
in place 适当地
in hopes of(或in the hope of) 怀着.......希望
in connection with 和……有关
in contact with 和……联系
in addition to 除......以外
in case of 倘若，万一
in conflict with 和......冲突
in force 有效的，大批
in depth 彻底地
in regard to 关于
in the neighborhood of 大约、邻近
in retrospect 回顾，一想起
in behalf of 代表......利益
in the least 一点，丝毫
in alarm 惊慌、担心
in the opinion of 据……见解
in the long run 从长远说来
in one's opinion 在……看来
in word 口头上
in a word 总之
in vain 无益地, 白白地
in case 如果，万一，以防
in detail 详细地
in haste 急急忙忙地
in conclusion 总之
in spite of 尽管
in other words... 换句话说
in return 作为回报
in the name of 以......名义
be confident in 对......有信心
be interested in 对......感兴趣
in doubt 怀疑
in love 恋爱中
in debt 负债
in fun (jest、joke) 玩笑地
in hesitation 犹豫不决
in wonder 在惊奇中
in public (secret) 公开他(秘密地)
in a good humour 心情(情绪)好
"介词at、to表方向，攻击、位置、善、恶、分"。
介词at和to都可以表示方向; 用at表示方向时，侧重于攻击的目标，往往表示恶意；用to表示方向时，突出运动的位置或动作的对象，侧重表示善意。试比较下列各句：
1. A．She came at me. 她向我扑过来。
B．She came to me. 她向我走过来。
2．A．Jake ran at John. 几 杰克向约翰扑过去。
B．Jake ran to John. 杰克朝约翰跑去。
3．A. He rushed at the woman with a sword. 他拿着剑向那妇女扑过去。
B. He rushed to the woman with a sword. 他带着剑向那妇女跑过去。
4．A．He shouted at the old man. 他大声喝斥那老人。
B. He shouted to the old man. 他大声向那老人说
5．A．I heard her muttering at Xiao Li. 我听见她在抱怨小李。
B．I heard her muttering to Xiao Li. 我听见她在同小李低声说话。
6．A. She talked at you just now. 她刚才还说你坏话呢。
B．She talked to you just now. 她刚才还同你谈话呢.
7．A．She threw a bone at the dog. 她用一块骨头砸狗。
B．She threw a bone to the dog. 她把一块骨头扔给狗吃。
8．A．He presented a pistol at me. 他用手枪对着我。
B．He presented a pistol to me. 他赠送我一支手枪。
日子、日期、年月日，星期加上早午晚; 以下皆用on。
例: on Octorber the first 1949 1949年10月1日
on February the thirteenth l893 1893年2月13日
on May the first 5月1日
on the first 1号
on the sixteenth 16号
on the second of January 或 on January the second 1月2日
on a summer evening 在夏天的一个夜晚
on Boxing Day 在节礼日(圣诞节次日)
on New Year's Day 在元旦
on my birthday 在我的生日
但 in the Christmas holidays在圣诞节假期; in the eighteenth century 在十八世纪; in ancient times 在古代; in earlier times 在早期; in modern times 在现代，则用in，the present time 现在，at the present day当今则用at。
on May Day 在"五·一"节
on winter day 在冬天
on Decenber 12th 1950 l950年12月12日
on Sunday 在星期天
on Monday 在星期一
on Tuesday morning 星期二早晨
on Saturday afternoon 星期六下午
on Friday evening 星期五晚上
但last night 昨夜；in the evening 在晚上; on time准时，in time及时，等则不同。
年月日，加早午晚，of之前on代in
例： on the morning of 18th 18日早晨
on the evening of 4th 4日晚上
On the eve of their departure they gave a farewell banquet and their head gave a garewell speech. 他们在临行前夕举行了一次告别宴会，他们的团长发表了告别讲话。
收音、农场，值日on
例：Did your supervisor like the story over (or on) the radio last night
您的导师喜欢昨天从收音机里听到的故事吗
I heard the news over (or on) the radio. 我从收音机里听到了这一条消息。
taIk over the radio 由无线电播音
on TV 从电视里......
hear something on the wireless 在无线电里听到
My brother works on an Army reclamation farm. 我哥哥在一个军垦农场工作。
The students are working on a school farm. 学生们正在校办农场劳动。
This is a farmer's house on a farm. 这是农场的农舍。
Who is on duty, tody 今天谁值日
We go on duty at 8 a.m. 我们上午8点钟上班。
关于、基础、靠、著论
例: This afternoon we are going to listen to a report on the international situation. 今天下午我们要听关于国际形势的报告。
Professor Shen will give us a talk on travelling in America. 申教授将给我们做关于美国之行的报告。
You are wrong on all these issues. 在这些问题上你的看法都错了。
The belief is based on practical experience. 这种信念是以实际经验为基础的。
Theory must be based on practice. 理论必须以实践为基础。
The people in the south live on rice. 南方人主食大米。(靠)
The citizens live on their salaries. 城市人靠薪金生活。
You can't afford luxuries, on an income of 100 yuan a month． 靠月薪100元的收入，你是买不起奢侈品的。
Her pet dogs were fed on the choicest food． 她用精饲料喂养她心爱的狗。
He is just a scrounger, who lives on other people. 他正是一个小偷，专靠损害别人过日子。
Keep the kettle on the boil (=boiling). 让水壶的水一直开着。
The enemy are on the run (=running). 敌人在逃跑。
on后接the加上一个作名词的动词．其意义与现在分词所表达的相近。类似例子很多如：
on the march在行军中，on the mend 在好转中，on the prowl徘徊，on the move活动中，on the scrounge巧取豪夺(埋语)，on the go活跃，忙碌，on the lookout注意, 警戒，on the watch监视着。on the hop趁不备抓住某人等等。
on the People's Democratic Dictatorship<<实践论>>和<<矛盾论>>
on the People's Democratic Dictatorship<<论人民民主专政>>
"on Coalition Government" <<论联合政府>>
着、罢、出售、偷、公、假，故意、支付，相反、准
注：口诀中的"着"是指着火，罢指罢工，偷指偷偷地，公指出差、办公事；假指休假，准指准时。
例：The house next to mine was on fire. 我邻居的房子着火了。
The workers of the railway station were on strike. 铁路工人罢工了。
Grapes and big water melons from Sinkiang are on sale on a large sale. 新疆葡萄和西瓜大量上市了。
do something on the sly (quiet). 秘密地(暗地里，偷偷地)做某事。
I've come here on business. 我是有公事来的。
They went to Bern on a mission. 他们到伯尔尼去执行一项使命。
They has been away on a long trip. 他们出去做一次长途旅行。
I'll go home on leave next month. 下月我将休假回家。
I went on business to Shanghai. I did not take leave. 我是公出去上海的，不是不告面别。
She came to see you on purpose. 她是专程来看你的。
He came here on purpose to discuss it with you. 他到这来是要与你讨论这件事的。
This lunch is on me.
"No. let's go Dutch."
"这顿午饭我付钱。"
"不，还是各付各的。"
On the contrary, it was very easy to understand. 相反，这事儿很容易理解。
P1ease come on time. (on schedule). 请准时来。
注：in time是"及时"的意思。
The train arrived on schedule. 火车准时到达。
特定时间和"一……就"，左右on后动名词
例：Gases expand on heating and contract on cooling. 气体加热时膨胀，冷却时收缩。(特定时间)
On entering the room, he found his friends dancing in high spirits. 一进屋，他就发现他的朋友们在愉快地跳舞。
On reaching the city he called up Lao Yang. 一到城里他就给老杨打了一个电话。
I'll write to him on hearing from you. 我接到你的来信就给他写信。(一……就)
以及on the left, right向左向右，on the stair在台阶上等。
步行、驴、马、玩笑on，cab，carriage用in
例：On foot步行; on horse骑马; on donkey 骑驴。
He rode on, blood flowing from his side. 他骑着马，鲜血从腰部流下来。
The soldier of the Eighth Route Army rode 100 li on a horse a day in order to catch up with his unit. 为赶上部队，那位八路军战士骑马日行百里。
Go on horse back! 骑马去！
You are having me on! 你和我开玩笑呢!
in cab和in carriage 不能用on或by cab或carrige。
at山脚、门口在当前，速、温、日落价核心
即在山脚下、在门口、在目前，速度、以……速率、温度、在日落时、在……核心要用at。
例：At the foot of the mountain, there are thirty of our comrades. 在山脚下，有我们30个同志。
There is a beautiful lake at the foot of the hill. 山脚下有一个美丽的湖。
At the gate of the house there are many children playing glassball. 门口有一大群孩子在玩玻璃球。
Who's standing there at the door 谁站在门口
I don't need the dictionary at present. 我现在还不需要这本词典。
He is at present in Washington. 他目前正在华盛顿。
The train runs at fifty kilometres an hour. 火车每小时行驶50公里。
we built the plant at top speed and minimun cost. 我们以最低的投资，最高的速度修建了该工厂。
at home 在国内，在家里
at ten degrees centigrade 在摄氏10度
at minus ten degrees centigrade 摄氏零下10度
Water freezes at 0°centigrade. 水在镊氏零度结冰。
Water usually boils at 100°. 水通常在摄氏loo度沸赐。
at zero 在零度
at the rate of 45 miles an hour
at full speed 全速
at a good price 高价
at a low cost 低成本
at a great cost 花了很大代价
at that time 在当时
Evaporation takes place at all tempertures. 蒸发在任何温度下都能发生。
at 1000RPM (revolution per minute) 每分钟1000转
at a high speed 高速
The soldiers launched an attack upon the enemy at sunset. 战士们在日落时对敌人发起了攻击。
at daybreak 日出时
The force at the core leading our cause forward is the Chinese Communist Party. 领导我们事业的核心力量是中国共产党。
The atom has a nucleus at its core. 在原子的中心有一个原于核。
At the beginning of this term the teacher in charge of our class was very strict with us. 这学期开始，我们的班主任老师对我们要求非常严格2012届高考英语语法专题复习介词考点汇总
介词不能单独使用，必须后跟宾语，构成介词短语在句中使用，介词短语由介词+宾语构成，在句中可作状语、定语和表语等。
in, on, to, with, by, for, at, from, up, beyond, before, among, of, off, against, like, since, besides, behind, during等
about
be about to … 即将做……
What/How about … ……怎么样
for
交换： He sold the house for 50,000 yuan.
达到某一数值：She wrote a check for ￡20.
赞成，拥护：I’m for getting up early and going to bed early.
固定搭配：
for one thing 首先
for example 例如
for ever 永远
for the time being 暂时，目前
for instance 例如
for free 免费
for the first time 第一次
for sale 出售，待售
watch out for 警惕
long for 渴望
for one’s good 为（某人）好
with
和……一起:：He is playing table tennis with Tom.
用……工具：Don’t write with a pencil.
随着：The weather changes with seasons.
带有，具有：Our company needs people with specialized knowledge.
行为方式：Handle with care！
原因：She shivered with cold.
注意：with的复合结构 ：常在句中作状语，表示伴随动作、行为方式及原因、条件或结果等情况。
She often sleeps with the window open. (adj.)
她经常开着窗户睡觉。
He came in with a book in his hand. (prep.)
他手里拿着本书进来了。
She felt scared with so many people looking at her. （doing）
这么多人看着她，她感到害怕。
With everything bought, he left the market. (done)
买完了所需要的东西之后，他离开了市场。
With nothing to do, he went out for a walk .(to do)
由于没有什么事情可做，他便到外面散步。
He left his room with the light on. (adv.)
他离开了房间，灯亮着。
by
用于被动结构：This book was written by Lu Xun.
表地点，“靠近，在……的旁边”：There is a pumping station by the river.
表时间，“在……之前，不迟于”： You must hand in your homework by tomorrow.
表方法、手段：You will make progress only by studying hard.
途径： He entered by the back door.
表示按某物标准或单位：The company paid me by the hour.
根据，按照……：Don’t judge a person by his appearance.
触及，持住某人的身体或衣物：I took the boy by the hand.
表增减程度： He missed the target by an inch.
固定搭配：
little by little 逐渐地
stone by stone 一块石头一块石头地
one by one 一个一个地
by mistake 由疏忽所至
by no means 决不
by accident 偶然
by chance 偶然，碰巧
by oneself 独自
by and by 不久以后
by far ……得多，最……
to
趋于，倾向（某种情况，性质等），至某种状态： I was moved to tears.
到（地点）：Last week her aunt came to Shanghai.
给：I often write to my uncle.
差（时间）：It is ten to eleven.
比： The score is 2 to 1.
伴随：He danced to the music.
他随着音乐跳舞。
固定搭配:
to one’s delight =to the delight of sb. 使某人高兴的是
to one’s joy = to the joy of sb. 使某人高兴的是
to one’s sorrow=to the sorrow of sb. 使某人悲伤的是
to one’s astonishment =to the astonishment of sb. 使某人大吃一惊的是
to one’s surprise =to the surprise of sb. 使某人吃惊的是
off
离……, 从……离开：It is an island off the coast of France.
through
通过，“从一边进，从另一边出”：She pushed her way through the crowd.
由于：The war was lost through bad organization.
从头至尾，由始至终：I read through the book.
各处：We traveled through France.
beyond
表示位置在那一边，超出（范围、限度）：
My home is beyond the bridge.
This is beyond my comprehension.
The fruit was beyond my reach.
against
反对，违背：We are against waste.
靠着，倚： I sat against the wall.
以……为背景，衬托： The picture looks good against that light wall.
防御：We are all taking medicine against the disease.
我们大家都在吃药预防那种病。
与……相反，逆着： We sailed against the wind.
at
在 （表空间、地点）：I don’t know the man standing at the gate.
在……时刻（表时间）：We usually go to work at two in the afternoon.
以……（速度、价格）：They sold their beef at a high price.
处于……状态，从事于： The two countries were at war.
表示目标，意为“朝，对”：We had a heated argument and shouted at each other.
与有情感的词语连用（如angry, delighted, glad, happy, sad, disappointed, shocked, excited等）表示产生这些感情的原因，“因为，对于”：
I was surprised at the news.
We were in deep sorrow at his death.
I’m glad at hearing your return home from Canada.
His parents were disappointed at his losing the chance to university.
固定搭配：
at the latest 最迟
at sea 在海上，在航海
at once 马上
at most 至多
at least 至少
at first 起初，开始的时候
at present 目前
at one time 曾经
at a time 一次
at breakfast 吃早餐时
at the same time 同时
at stake 在胜败关头，冒风险
over
超过：There are over twenty girls in our class.
遍于：I have traveled all over Europe.
在……上方（与under相反）：There is a bridge over the river.
越过(尤指先往上再往下)：He jumped over the wall.
在……期间： Will you be at home over Christmas
通过： I don’t want to say it over the telephone.
在……上面盖着：He put the newspaper over his face.
in
在……方面：Your success in the examination depends upon your efforts now.
用……语言： He wrote a letter in English.
表示计算或度量的标准，“用……，以……”：The energy is measured in calories.
在……之内（表时间或空间）：The work was completed in two weeks.
过……后（时间）:It will be ready in a week.
穿、戴：He is in a silk shirt.
表状态：He was in poor health.
The room is in a mess.
表示原材料：The letter was written in ink.
固定搭配：
in public 公开地
in order to 为了
in no time 立刻
in common 共同，共用
in all 总共
in fact 实际上
in the end 最后，终于
in the distance 在远处
in a low voice 低声地
in a word 总之
in other words 换句话说
in modern times 现代，近代
in place 在适当的地方
in general 一般说来
in the past 在过去
in this way 用这种方法
in return 作为回报
in short 简言之
in the open air 在户外
take pride in 以……自豪
take part in 参加
play a part in 在……方面起作用
in the form of 以……形式
in sight 在视力范围之内，看得见
in case 万一
in the name of 以……名义
in detail 详细地
on
在……的表面上：There are two maps on the wall.
在……的时候（某日或某日的上午、下午、晚上），表具体或特殊的日子：
On the morning of November 12, 1939, Dr. Bethune breathed his last.
有关，论及：I have written an article on the importance of birth control.
在……河畔，沿着：London is on the Thames.
是……的一员：My classmate is on China Daily.
固定搭配：
on doing sth. 一……就……
on leave 休假
on purpose 故意
on holiday 度假
on the whole 总的来说
on fire 着火
on one’s own 独自，单独
on strike 罢工
on the left/right 在左/右边
on the contrary 相反地
on sale 出售/减价
on average 平均
on the air （无线电/电视）播送
on board 在车/船/飞机上
call on sb. 拜访某人
on behalf of 代表
On (hearing)... 一（听到）……就……
of
和某一动词连用表示“想到”，“谈到”：He began to talk of his hometown.
表示所属关系：He is a worker of the Beijing.
from
from among(从……当中)，from behind （从……后面），from under (从……下面)，at about (在大约……左右)，after about(在大约……之后)，from across(从……的对岸)，from above(从……上方)等
I took a ball from under the table. 我从桌底拿出一个球。
易错点点拨：
1．in 与within
in后接表示时间长度的名词，可以与将来时或过去时连用。如果它与将来时连用，则常表示“过一段时间之后”；如果与非将来时连用，常表示“在……之内”。
The train will arrive in fifteen minutes. 火车还有十五分钟就到了。
within后接表示时间长度的名词，表示在这一范围之内，“不超过，不到”某一段时间。可以同将来时和过去时连用，比in更正式。
I shall be back within three weeks. 我三周之内回来。
2．in 和after
in后接一段时间，after接某一点的时间，均可用于将来时。in不可以接表示某一点的时间名词，而after如果在过去时的句子中可以加一段的时间名词，表示从过去某一时间算起，in加一段时间指从现在的时间算起。
I’ll come back in an hour.
我要在一小时后回来。 ( in an hour为一段时间 )
I’ll come back after three o’clock.
我要在三点钟之后回来。（ three o’clock为时间点 ）
3．through , across和over
它们都可用作介词，与动词连用，表示“通过，穿过”。但across强调在某一物体平面上运动，与on有关，侧重横贯式横向通过；through强调运动在某一物体的三维空间（内部）进行，与in有关，侧重在空间穿过；over是从某物体上方越过，或在高形物上穿过，当表示在某一长形物的另一边时用法同across.
Then we took off and flew over the mountain.
随后我们起飞了，飞过高山。
The road runs through the village.
这条路穿过这村子。
They walked across the square.
他们走过广场。
4．besides 和except, but
besides “除……之外，还有……”，表示附加意义；except “除了，不包括”，常与表示全肯定或全部否定的词连用，表示整体中除去例外，即整体中不再包括除去部分。but意义与except相同，但语气较except弱；使用except的限制较少，而使用but则有许多限制，but只能用在none, all, nobody, anybody, everything, everyone,以及who, what, where之后。
We all went to the party besides Tom.
除了汤姆参加了晚会，我们也去了。
We all went to the party except /but Tom.
除了汤姆没去晚会，我们都去了。
Who but/except a fool would do such a thing
除了傻瓜，有谁会做这样的事情呢？
5．except 和except for
except 是从一组东西中排除其特殊一个或几个，except for则是以保留的方式对整个句子内容进行修正，也就是说，如果两部分所用的词或词组所表示的并非同一类事，而它们之间又是所属关系，句子后半部对前半部所说的基本情况在细节上加以修正，就要用except for。except只用于句中、句末，不用于句首。Except for可用于句首。
I looked everywhere except in the bathroom.
除了浴室之外，我到处都看了。
He is a good man except for hot temper.
他是个好人，只是脾气暴躁而已。
6．It be + 形容词+ for sb. to do sth./ It be + 形容词+of sb. to do sth.
如果句型中的形容词描述的是sb.的品质、品格，在逻辑上可以作sb.的表语，则sb.前应用介词of，否则就用for。
It’s necessary for us to use a short-wave radio to pick up the programmes.
我们用一台短波收音机收听这些节目是必要的。
It was foolish of him to give up the job.
他放弃那工作是愚蠢的。（= He was foolish to give up the job.）
7. between 和 among
between 一般表示在两者之间，也可表示在两个以上的人或物的两者之间。
among用于三者以上，常指数目不确定的事物，还可用于最高级=one of…
虽然between和among都可表示在两者以上之间，但among用于不分别看待的一堆或一群人或物之间，between强调把两者以上各个个体分别看待，而且这些人或物为数不多，彼此界限分明,强调每两者之间的关系。
Distribute the books among the students.
把书发给学生。（有一群学生）
The speaker referred to the relations between the three countries.
发言的人提到了这三个国家之间的关系。（这三个国家之间的每两者间的关系）
China is among the oldest countries in the world.
中国是世界上最古老的国家之一。（among =one of）
8. by, in 和with
by 表示方法、手段,交通工具；in 表示原料、语言等；with 表示用工具和五官等
I write with my right hand.
我用右手写字。（五官）
The article was written in ink.
这篇文章是用钢笔写的。（in ink 表示原料=with a pen表示工具）2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义英语"方位"表示法
英语方位表示法为数不少，但容易混淆。特别是几个介词的用法常常令自学者无所适从。有时"一字之差"就可能"失之千里"。为此，笔者拟用比较的方式以east为例介绍一些常见的方位表示法。
(一)in the east 与 on the east的区别
1．in the east表示我们生活中和地理位置上的绝对方向。如：
The sun rises in the east and sets in the west.太阳从东边升起，从西边落下。
The Great Wall begins in the east from the Shanhaiguan Pass and ends at the Jiayuguan Pass in the west.长城东起山海关，西至嘉峪关。
2．on the east表示某事物位于另一事物所朝的方向。这里的方向是相对而言的。如：
China faces the Pacific on the east.中国东临太平洋。
The United States faces the Atlantic on the east and the Pacific on the west.美国东临大西洋，西濒太平洋。
(二) in (to，on，at) the east of
1．要表示A在B的东部，即：A在B的范围之内时就用"A is in the east of B"，如：
Japan is in the east of Asia.日本在亚洲东部。
Italy is in the south of Europe.意大利在欧洲南部。
2．如果A在B的东方，即：A在B的范围之外，且相隔有一定的距离，就用"A lies to the east of B".口语中有时可将to the省去。如：
Japan lies (to the) east of China.日本位于中国东方。
France lies (to the) east of England.法国位于英国东方。
3．如果A在B的东边（侧），即：A与B相邻接。就用"A is on the east of B".如：
Guangdong is on the south of Hunan.广东在湖南南边。
Shangdong is on the north of Jiangsu.山东在江苏北边。
4．如果把方位词当作一个整体看，或是看成一点，就用"A is at the east of B" 如:
There was a big battle at the north of the Liaodong Peninsula.在辽东半岛的北边有一场大战。
5．如果要表示"A位于B东面100公里处"时我们既可以说"A lies l00km to the east of B"，也可以说"A lies 100km east of B". 后者在美国口语中更为常见。如：
The plane crashed 30 miles south of the city.飞机在离城南30英里处坠毁。
Suzhou lies 50 miles to the west of Shanghai.苏州位于上海西面50英里处。
(三) 汉语里"东南西北"的先后顺序到英语里就变成了north，south，east，west；并由此有了下列中、英文表达上的差异。
东南方：southeast 西南方：southwest
西北方：northwest 东北方：northeast
The Ming Tombs are located about 50 km to the northwest of Beijing. 十三陵位于北京西北50公里处。
Tianjin is situated l20 km southeast of Beijing. 天津位于北京东南120公里处。
(四)要表示方位的"偏向"时通常用by
正东偏北： east by north 正南偏西： south by west
正北偏东： north by east 正南偏东： south by east
We are sailing in the direction of east by north.我们正朝着正东偏北方向航行。
The island lies south by east from here.那个岛位于此地的正南偏东方向2012届高考英语语法专题复习二轮精品虚拟语气特例
1、在错综条件句子中，虚拟条件从句和主句动作发生的时间不一致，因此，主句和从句的谓语动词应根据所指的时间选用适当的虚拟语气形式。例如：
1）if I were you，I wouldn’t have missed the film last night．如果我是你，我就不会错过昨天晚上的那部电影。（从句与现在事实相反，主句与过去事实相反。）
2）if he had followed the doctor\s advice，he would recover already．如果他遵照医生的劝告，现在病就好了。（从句与过去事实相反，主句与现在事实相反。）
2、在if虚拟条件句中，有时可把连词省去，采用倒装语序把谓语动词were或助动词did，had，should移到句首构成非真实条件从句的另一种句型，其意思不变。例如：
1）had we time to spare，we would be glad to go to the park．如果能抽出时间，我们很乐意逛
2）were it not for the discovery of electricity，the modern world would experience great inconvenience．假如没有发现电，现代世界将很不方便。
3、有时假设的情况不用if引导虚拟条件从句来表述，而用介词（如without， but for等）引出的短语、分词（如supposing等）引出的短语、并列连词（如or，otherwise，but，though等）、由动词suppose引出的祈使句或通过上下文的意思来表达。此时句中谓语动词仍采用虚拟语气的相应形式。例如：
1）but for your advice，I would not be able to do this work．要不是你的劝告，我是不会做这份工作的。
2）victor obviously doesn’ t know what\s happened，otherwise he wouldn’t have made such a stupid remark．显然维克多不知道发生了什么事情。不然的话，他就不会说这样愚蠢的话了。
4、在一些表示愿望、建议、请求、命令等含义的动词后面的宾语从句中，谓语动词用动词原形或\"should ＋动词原形\"表示虚拟语气。这类动词有ask，demand， insist，order，propose，move，desire，require等。例如：
1）they demanded that the aggressor troops（should）be withdrawn immediately．他们要求立即撤出侵略军。
2）i moved that he（should）be discharged for his serious mistake．我建议，由于他犯有严重错误，应解除他的职务。
5、在\"would（had）rather（would sooner，would as soon）＋宾语从句\"句型中，要求后面的宾语从句用虚拟语气。但这种虚拟语气表示的不是与事实相反的假设，而是一种尚未实现的愿望，其从句谓语动词用一般过去时。例如：
1）i would rather you came next Friday．我希望你下周五来。
2）i\d just as soon you didn’t speak rudely to her．我真希望你别对她那么粗鲁地讲话。
6、在和idea，necessity，plan， motion，order，proposal，recommendation，suggestion，under- standing等词有关的同位语或表语从句中，谓语动词用动词原形或\"should ＋动词原形\"表示虚拟语气。例如：
1）m y idea is that the group（should）hold another session to discuss the problem．我的意见是小组召开另一次会议来讨论这个问题。
2）emphasis is laid on the necessity that all the objectives to be attained be taken into account before starting a new project．我们强调在开始制定一个新的计划之前，必须把要达到的所有目标都考虑进去。
7、在某些\"it is ＋形容词＋that．．．\"句型中，如\"it is important（necessary，essential， natural，desirable，unusual，pity，strange）that．．．\"，that所引导的主语从句中谓语动词均用动词原形或\"should ＋动词原形\"来表示虚拟语气。例如：
1）it is highly desirable that a new president be appointed for this college．人们迫切地希望能给这个学院派一个新院长。
2）it is strange that the girl（should）be so arrogant．真奇怪，这个女孩竟会如此傲慢。
8、在\"it is ordered（suggested，demanded，moved，planned等）＋that．．．\"这个句型中，that引导的主语从句要用虚拟语气形式，谓语动词用动词原形或\"should ＋动词原形\"。
1）it is moved that Lucy give a performance at the party．有人提议露茜在晚会上表演一个节目。
2）it was suggested that more teachers （should）be sent there to help them．有人建议派更多的老师去那儿帮助他们。
9、as if ／though可以引出一个状语从句也可以引出一个表语从句。当as if ／though跟在be，feel，look，seem ，sound等系动词之后时，引导的是表语从句；如果主句的谓语动词不是联系动词be等，as if ／though引导的则是方式状语从句。无论是哪种类型的从句，只要从句的内容是不真实的，都必须用虚拟语气。当从句表示与现在的事实相反，谓语动词用一般过去时；表示与过去事实相反要用\"had ＋过去分词\"；表示与将来可能相反的则用\"would（could，might）＋动词原形\"。例如：
1）i feel as if i were going to faint．我感到我像要昏过去似的。（与现在事实相反的表语从句）
2）she cried as if her heart could be broken．她哭的好像心都要碎了。（与将来可能相反的主语从句）
10、在it is（about ／high）time引导的定语从句中，也可以根据需要使用虚拟语气，用以表示\"（此刻）该做......而没有做\"的意思，其谓语动词用过去时或\"should ＋动词原形（用should时，不能将其省略）\"。例如：
1）it is time i should leave．我该走了。
2）it is about time that you got（should get） dressed．你该穿衣服了。
11、if only引导的是省略了表示结果的主句的虚拟结构，现在已成为惯用法，表达愿望。从句用过去时表示现在没有实现的愿望；对过去没有实现或不能实现的愿望，从句就用过去完成时。这类句型表示一种不真实的条件，常译成\"要是......就好了！\"例如：
1）if only i had taken mother\s advice．我要是听取妈妈的建议就好了。
2）if only i could speak several foreign languages．我要是能讲几种外语就好了。
12、在以in order that，so that，lest引导的目的状语从句中，谓语动词一般用虚拟语气。从句中的谓语动词用\"may（might）＋动词原形\"或\"should ＋动词原形\"。在以lest引导的从句中，谓语动词用\"should ＋动词原形\"。例如：
1）she stayed at home for a few days so that she might take care of her sick mother．她在家里呆了好几天，以便能照顾生病的母亲。
2）the teacher explained the sentences again and again in order that the students could understand them clearly．老师一再解释这些句子以便学生能够清楚地理解。2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义主谓一致
1. One third of the country ______ covered with trees and the majority of the citizens ______ black people. (2011·湖南卷26)
A. is; are B. is; is C. are; are D. are; is
【解析】选A。分数及百分比后接名词的谓语动词由名词的单复数来决定。名词为单数谓语动词就用单数；名词为复数，谓语动词则用复数。a/the majority of(大多数)后接复数谓语动词用复数。
2. The factory used 65 percent of the raw materials, the rest of which ______ saved for other purposes. (2011·安徽卷27)
A. is B. are C. was D. were
【解析】选D。the rest of ＋n.后的谓语动词单复数由名词单复数而定。此句中which指代raw materials(原材料)。根据前后句的时态一致性可知要用一般过去时。进行含义。
考点1.代词作主语
Nothing but stamps and envelopes ______ for sale.
A. are B. is C. are left D. remain
【解析】选B。nothing作主语表单数概念，谓语动词用单数。but后的名词不影响谓语动词的单复数。
主谓一致的原则：形式一致；内容一致；就近一致。
1. 由each, either, neither, one, the other, another, anyone, anybody, anything, everyone, everybody, everything, someone, somebody, something, nobody, no one, nothing等指代单数名词的不定代词作主语时，谓语动词用单数。
2．主语是who, what, which, all, more, most, some, any, none, the rest等时，谓语动词的形式须依据具体情况而定。
3. such, the same 起指示代词作用时，应根据其所指定的内容来决定单复数。
考点2.名词作主语
Apples of this kind ______ well.
A. sells B. sell C. is sold D. are sold
【解析】选B。n. ＋ of this kind后的谓语动词由名词单复数来定。sell well 畅销，用主动表被动。
1. 主语是board, family, class, team, group, crowd, audience, company, crew, committee, enemy, government, party等名词，如果作为整体，谓语动词用单数形式；如果作为其中一个一个的成员，谓语动词用复数形式。
2. 主语是时间、距离、价格、度量衡单位等名词或短语，不论它们是单数还是复数，谓语动词一般用单数形式。
3. 主语是news, politics, physics, plastics, mathematics等名词时，谓语动词常用单数形式。
4. 主语若是书名、剧名、报纸杂志名称或国家、单位名称时，即使名词是复数形式，谓语动词也只能用单数形式。
5. 主语是clothes, compasses, goods, glasses, trousers, scissors, shoes, gloves等名词时，谓语动词常用复数形式。
6. 主语是kind of, type of, pair of, amount of, quantity of+名词时，谓语动词的形式须依照kind, type, amount, pair, quantity的数而确定。
7. 主语是the number of +名词复数时，谓语动词用单数形式。但主语是a number of +名词复数时，谓语动词却用复数形式。[来源:金太阳新课标资源网]
8. population作主语时，谓语一般用单数；但其前有(百)分数时，谓语一般用复数。
9. 主语是 means, works(工厂), sheep, fish, Japanese, Chinese等名词时，谓语动词的形式须依照它们在句中的意义来确定。
考点3.两个或两个以上的名词连在一起作主语
No bird and no beast ______ on the lonely island.
A. are seen B. is seen
C. see D. sees
【解析】选 B。 no A and no B 后谓语动词用单数。
1. 用and连接并列主语，谓语动词通常用复数形式。如： To play football and to go swimming are useful for character training. 但是如果并列主语指的是同一个人，同一事物或同一概念时，如bread and butter; soda and water; coffee and water; aim and end; salt and water等，谓语动词用单数形式。 如When and where to go for the on salary holiday hasn't been decided yet.
2. the+n1+and+n2指同一个人，如the writer and painter, 谓语动词用单数形式。
3. and所连接的两个名词前分别有every, each, no, many a 等修饰时，谓语动词用单数形式。
4. 主语是连接词or, either…or…， neither…nor…， whether…or…， not… but…， not only…but also…等连接的名词或代词时，谓语动词的形式须与最接近的名词或代词保持一致。
5. 主语是“A+ with / as well as / along with / together with / like / rather than / except / but / including / plus / besides / in addition to+B”结构时，谓语须与A保持一致。
6. more than one+名词单数；a+名词单数+or two等作句子的主语时，谓语动词用单数形式。
考点4. “the+形容词或分词”作主语
The wounded ______ been carried to hospital already.
A. is B. are
C. has D. have
【解析】选D。“the+分词”指人作主语时，谓语动词一般用复数形式。
1. “the+形容词或分词”指人作主语时，谓语动词一般用复数形式。
2. “the+形容词或分词”指抽象概念作主语时，谓语动词一般用单数形式。
考点5.句子、短语作主语
Most of what has been said about the Smiths______also true of the Johnsons.
A. are B. is C. being D. to be
【解析】选B。
1. 主语是不定式或动名词时，谓语动词常用单数形式。
2. 主语是从句时，谓语动词一般用单数形式，但在“主语+系动词+表语”结构中，如果是what从句作主语，其谓语的单复数取决于后面的表语。
3. 在强调句型“It +be +被强调部分+ that/who …”中， be总是用单数形式；that/who 后的谓语动词的形式必须跟被强调的主语保持一致。
4. 定语从句中谓语动词的形式必须跟先行词保持一致。
Barbara is the only one of the athletes who ______ a winner of the 100 metre race in our town since 1998.
A. is B. are C. have been D. has been
【解析】选D。 当one 之前有the 或the only/very/just时，定语从句则是修饰the (only/very/just) one 的，谓语动词用单数。此题中后有时间状语since 1998，故用现在完成时。
温馨提示：在“one of +名词复数+定语从句”结构中，定语从句的谓语动词一般用复数形式，但当one前面有the (only)修饰时，定语从句的谓语动词一般是用单数形式。
5. 当There / Here be后有几个主语时， be与邻近的主语保持一致。2012届高考英语语法专题复习讲义荟萃名词性从句
( )1. Why don’t you bring ________ to his attention that you are too busy to do it
A．this B．that C．it D．what
( )2. The fact ________ he didn’t see Lao Li yesterday is true.
A．which B．that C．when D．what
( )3. The book looks ________ it had been out in the rain.
A．that B．whether C．as though D．what
( )4. I have no idea ________ he will come back.
A．where B．when C．what D．that
( )5. ________ the old man’s sons wanted to know was ________ the gold had been hidden.
A．That; what B．What; where C．What; that D．What; if
( )6. No one can tell ________ will happen next.
A．what B．when C．where D．which
( )7. You’re responsible to ________ is in charge of sales.
A．whom B．who C．whoever D．whomever
( )8. It is generally considered unwise to give a child ________ he or she wants.
A．however B．whatever C．whichever D．whenever
( )13. What the doctors really doubt is________ my mother will recover from the serious illness soon.
A．when B．how C．whether D．why
( )14. Our hometown is quite different from ________ before.
A．that it was B．what it was C．which it was D．when it was
( )15. Someone is knocking at the door. Go and see________.
A．who is he B．who he is C．who is it D．who it is
( )16.________surprised us very much that Tom should have left without a word.
A．he B．It C．This D．That
( )17. Some college students are seen doing ________ work they can find to support themselves.
A．that B．which C．whatever D．no matter what
( )18. Things were not ________ they had been before.
A．as B．because C．that D．when
( )19. After________ seemed an endless effort，the patient was finally able to carry out________ seemed a perfectly normal walk.
A. what；what B．that; that C．it; that D．which; like
( )20. He was ill. That is ________ he didn’t come yesterday.
A．when B．why C．how D．that
参考答案
1. C it是形式宾语，真正的宾语是由that引导的从句。
2. B 同位语从句说明 fact 的具体内容，用 that 引导，不能省略。that只起连词作用，不作句子成分。
3. C as though/as if引导表语从句，意为“好像”。
4. B 用 when 引导同位语从句，表示将回来的时间，A、C、D三项均与题意不符。
5. B 第一空格考查what引导主语从句且在主语从句中作宾语；第二空格考查 where引导的表语从句，指地点。
9. C A is to B what C is to D意为“A与B的关系就等于C与D的关系”。又如：Air is to man what water is to fish.空气之于人犹如水之于鱼。
10. C whose 在宾语从句中作表语。
11. A 考查when引导的宾语从句。句意：我记得曾经这家工厂只有一个小车间和两台机器，只有when指时间。
12. B 从句中谓语动词 do 已有宾语 more, 可排除 A 和 D; 在介词之后要用 whether而不用 if 引导宾语从句，所以选B。
13. C whether引导表语从句，意为 “是否”。句意：医生真正怀疑的是我妈妈是否能很快从疾病中复原。
14. B what 引导的从句作介词的宾语，并在从句中作表语，而 that, when 则不能。
15. D 宾语从句用陈述语序，故可排除A项和C项；it可指未知的人或事物。故答案为D。
16. B it 作形式主语，引导主语从句， this，that不能作形式主语。
17. C whatever引导名词性从句，在从句中修饰work，意为：“无论什么工作”，符合题意。而no matter what只能引导让步状语从句。
18. A as 引导表语从句。表示“正如，像……那样子”。
19. A after表示“在……之后”与时间名词连用时是介词而不是连词。两空均为what引导的宾语从句并在从句中作主语。
20. B why 引导表语从句，表示“(有病的)结果”。2012届高考英语语法专题复习定语从句类
定语从句：先行词，关系词，从句。
定语从句:也叫关系从句,修饰一个名词或代词,或是整个句子.被修饰的词叫先行词,引导从句的关系词.(关系代词和关系副词).定语从句通常在先行词之后
分类:限制性定语从句,对先行词起修饰或限制的作用;
非限制性定从句,对先行词起补充说明的作用.
一)关系词（关系代词或关系副词的选用原则）
关系代词 词行 先行词 充当成分
who 人 主、宾、表
Whom 人 宾
That 人&物 主、宾、表
Which 物 主、宾、表
As 物 主、宾
Whose=of whom\of which 人&物 定语
关系副词 When=at\in\on\during which 时间 状
Where=at\in\to which 地点 状
Why=for which 原因 状
that 在口语中可以代替关系副词 以上三者 状
二）选用注意要点:
1只能用that情况：
(1) 如果先行词是all, much, anything, something, nothing, everything, little, none ，few.等不定代词，关系代词一般只用that，不用which。例如：
(2) 如果先等词被 all ,little none any, only, few, much, no, some, very等词修饰，关系代词常用that,不用which.
(3) 如果先行词被序数词、形容词最高级修饰或者先行词是最高级时，关系代词常用that,不用which。
(4) 如果先等词被the only ,the very , the same ,the last修饰，关系代词常用that,不用which.
(5) 先行词有两个，一个指人，一个指物，关系代词应该用that。而不用who, which.
(6)who ,which开头的特殊疑问句中，关系代词用that.
(7) 关系代词作表语时，关系代词用that.
(8) 先行词是奇数词或是序数词时，关系代词用that .
(9) 当主句 “ there be “开头时，关系代词要用that 引导的定语从句修饰该句型的主语。
(10) 当先行词是 “ to be “ 后面的表语时关系代词用that .
2．只能用which的情况
非限制性定语从句中，不能用关系代词that,作宾语用的关系代词也不能省略。
those/that +名词后的定语从句用which引导。不能用关系代词that。
介词后只用which
4) which还有一种特殊用法，它可以引导从句修饰前面的整个主句，代替主句所表示的整体概念或部分概念。在这种从句中，which可以作主语，也可以作宾语或表语。
5）先行词是that时，关系代词要用which.。
6）关系代词后面有插入语时，应用关系代词 which.
三.of +关系代词：of whom表人，of which表物
1)在介词提前的情况下,当先行词是物时, 介词后只能跟which, 当先行词是人时, 介词后面只能是whom, 此时关系供词不可能用that , who, 也可以省略.
2)在含介词的动词短语中, 若介词与动词分开会导致意思的变化时,介词不能提前.
This is the English dictionary which you 're looking for.
3)当先行词是way 时,关系代词可能that , in which , 或者省略.
This is the way that / in which he memorizes English words.
四.关系副词：
1)当先行词时时间,并在从句作状语时,用关系副词when.(at, in , on ,during which)
I'll always remember the day when I first used E-mail to send message to my friends abroad.
2)当先行词时地点, 并在从句中作状语时, 用where.(in ,at, to which)
The factory where his mother works is in the east of the city
3)当先行词是原因, 并在从句中作状语时, 用关系副词why.(for which)
We all know the reson why she is late for the work today..
五限制性定语从句与非限制性定语从句的区别
限制性定语从句 非限制性定语从句
从句与先行词的关系 从句是先行词不可缺少的定语，如果省去，主句的意思就会不完整或不明确。 从句只是对先行词的附加说明，如果省去,主句的意思仍然清楚或完整
标 点 从句和主句之间不用逗号分开 从句和主句之间通常用逗号分开
关系代词 指人who (that) whom指物which (that)人和物whose关系代词在从句中作宾语时可以省去 指人who（作主语）whom（做宾语）指物which人和物的whose关系代词一般不可省
修饰 从句只修饰一个名词或代词 可以修饰一个名词或代词也可修饰整个主句
翻译 定语从句译在被修饰词的前面 定语从句通常被译成另一个独立的句子
限制性 非限制性
形式上 无逗号 有逗号
内容上 先行词不是唯一的 先行词是唯一的，定语从句可有可无。
关系词 可用that ,why.作宾语可以省略 不可用that ,why。关系词一律不省。
先行词 名词或代词 名词或代词，也可以使整个句子
汉语翻译 译作定语 译成并列句
定语从句练习1：1. Is there a bar around _____I can have something to eat
A. that B. what C. which D. where
2. The house, _____ was destroyed in the terrible fire, has been repaired.
A. the roof of which B. which roof C. its roof D. the roof
3. Edison made a lot of inventions, ____ of great importance.
A. which I think are B. which I think they are C. which I think they D. I think which are
4. I’ll talk about a newly-opened market ______ you may get all _______ you need.
A. in which; which B. where; that C. where; what D. which; that
5. Can you lend me the novel _____ the other day
A. that you talked B. you talked about it C. which you talked with D. you talked about
6. ____ is mentioned above, the number of the students in senior high school is increasing.
A. Which B. As C. That D. It
7. The fence in our garden, _____ my father built many years ago, has lasted for a long time.
A. that B. which C. what D. where
8. When lost in work, _____ he often was, he would forget all about eating and sleeping.
A. what B. so C. just like D. as
9. A football fan (球迷) is _____ has a strong interest in football.
A. a thing that B. something that C. a person who D. what
10. We travelled together as far as Chicago, _____ we said goodbye to each other.
A. which B. when C. why D. where
11. The matter _____ you were arguing about last night has been settled.
A. that B. what C. why D. for which
12. Will you please show me the way to the only tall building ____ stands near the post office
A. 不填 B. in which C. that D. where
13. His sister had become a teacher, ______ was what he wanted to be.
A. who B. what C. that D. which
14. With the development of agriculture, the people ____village I taught before have lived a happy life.
A. who B. whose C. in whose D. in which
15. I hope you will find this valley a beautiful place _____ you may spend your weekend.
A. which B. that C. when D. where
16. He must be from Africa, ____ can be seen from his skin. A. that B. as C. it D. what
17. Both the girl and her dog ____ were crossing the street were hit by a coming car.
A. which B. who C. they D. that
18. I, ____ your friend, will try my best to help you out. A. which are B. which is C. who is D. who am
19. Is this just the city ____ the foreign guests wish to pay a visit _____.
A. which, to B. to which, / C. that, to D. to that, /
20. It’s one of the most interesting stories ___ I have ___ read
A. which, never B. that, ever C. that, never D. which, ever
21. On my way home in the street I saw a lady ___ I thought was your aunt.A. who B. whom C. which D. whose
22. I remember that ____ took part in the ball party had a wonderful time.
A. all B. all that C. all which D. all what
23. This is the largest clock in the world, ____ the minute hand is six metres long.
A. that B. of which C. which D. whose
24. China is the birthplace of kites, _____ kite flying spread to Japan, Korea, Thailand and India.
A. from that B. from where C. from there D. from here
25. ____ is known to everybody, the moon travels round the earth once every month.
A. it B. As C. That D. What
26. The journey around the world took the old sailor nine months, _____ the sailing time was 226 days. （04广西）
A. of which B. during which C. from which D. for which
27. I work in a business ________ almost everyone is waiting for a great chance.（04湖南）
A. how B. which C. where D. that
28. There was time I hated to go to school. （04湖北）
A．a; that B．a; when C．the; that D．the; when
29. There are two buildings, stands nearly a hundred feet high.（04湖北）
A．the larger B．the larger of them C．the larger one that D．the larger of which
30. What surprised me was not what he said but he said it.（04湖北）
A．the way B．in the way that C．in the way D．the way which
31. The factory produces half a million pairs of shoes every year, 80% are sold abroad.（04辽宁）
A．of which B．which of C．of them D．of that
32. American women usually identify their best friend as someone ___ they can talk frequently.（04上海）
A. who B. as C. about which D. with whom
33. The English play __ my students acted at the New Year’s party was a great success. （04全国I）
A for which B at which C in which D on which
34. There are altogether eleven books on the shelf, ______ five are mine. （04全国IV）
A on which B in which C of which D from which
35. There were dirty marks on her trousers ______ she had wiped her hands. （04全国II）
A where B which C when D that
36. Luckily, we’d brought a road map without ______ we would have lost our way.
（04北京春季）A. it B. that C. this D. which
37. --- Why does she always ask you for help --- There is no one else __________, is there (05北京)
A. who to turn to B. she can turn to C. for whom to turn D. for her to turn
38. He was educated at a local grammar school, ______ he went on to Cambridge. （05山东）
A. from which B. after that C. after which D. from this
39. Many people who had seen the film were afraid to go to the forest when they remembered the scenes ______ people were eaten by the tiger. (05广东) A. in which B. by which C. which D. that
40. Her sister has become a lawyer, she wanted to be. （05湖北）
A．who B．that C．what D．which
41. Frank's dream was to have his own shop __to produce the workings of his own hands. （05湖南）
A. that B. in which C. by which D. how
42. The place ___ the bridge is supposed to be built should be___the cross-river traffic is the heaviest. (05江苏)
A. which; where B. at which; which C. at which; where D. which; in which
43. The schools themselves admit that not all children will be successful in the jobs __ they are being trained. (05江西) A．in that B．for that C．in which D．for which
44. I have many friends, some are businessmen. （05全国1）
A．of them B．from which C．who of D．of whom
45. If a shop has chairs __ women can park their men, women will spend more time in the shop. （05上海）
A. that B. which C. when D. where
46. Jim passed the driving test, ____ surprised everybody in the office.（05浙江）
A．which B．that C．this D．it
47. ____ I explained on the phone, your request will be considered at the next meeting. （05浙江）
A．When B．After C．As D．Since
48. Mark was a student at this university from 1999 to 2003, ____ he studied very hard and was made Chairman of the Students' Union. （05重庆）A. during which time B. for which time C. during whose time D. by that time
49. Last month, part of Southeast Asia was struck by floods, from ____effects the people are still suffering. （05天津）
A. that B. whose C. those D. what
50. I walked in our garden, ____ Tom and Jim were tying a big sign onto one of the trees. （05辽宁）
A．which B．when C．where D．that
参考答案
DAABD BBDCD ACDCD BDDBC ABBBB ACBDA ADCCA DBCAD BCDDD ACABC2012届高考英语语法专题复习讲义荟萃特殊句式
( )1. — Why can’t I park my car here
—At no time ________ in this area.
A．is parking permitted
B．parking is permitted
C．parking is it permitted
D．does parking permit
( )2. Not until they moved into the apartment ________ a girl had been killed in it.
A．they did know B．they know
C．didn’t they know D．did they know
( )3. Little ________ his wife though she was seriously ill.
A．he took care of B．he takes care of
C．does he take care of D．did he take care of
( )4. Early in the day ________ the forecast ________ there would be a dust storm.
A．come; that B．came; that
C．comes; that D．came; what
( )7. Not only________ from city to city but also from area to area.
A．the birthrate varies
B．varies the birthrate
C．does the birthrate vary
D．vary the birthrate
( )8. By no means ________，for he has never made any mistakes in his work.
A．Bob should be fired B．should Bob be fired
C．Bob be fired D．be Bob fired
( )9. — David has passed the driving test.
—________ and________.
A．So he has; so you have
B．So he has; so have you
C．So has he; so have you
D．So has he; so you have
( )10.________ preparations from now on，she would be able to finish the essay on Sunday.
A．Would she make B．If she make
C．Were she to make D．If she had made
( )11. Only when you have got sufficient data ________come to a sound conclusion.
A．can you B．you can
C．would you D．you would
( )12. ________received law degrees as today.
A．Never so many women have
B．The women aren’t ever
C．Women who have never
D．Never have so many women
( )13. Li Ping is an actress and sings very well. ________.
A．So is Zhang hua
B．So does Zhang hua
C．It was the same with Zhang hua
D．So it is with Zhang hua
( )14. Mr White promised to help me and ________the next day.
A．neither he did B．so he did
C．neither did he D．so did he ( )17.—Why are you making so much noise
—I just can’t help________ .
A．so B．that C．this D．it
( )18. ________ seems to be a strong competition in China for senior high students to enter college or university.
A．It B．Which C．What D．That
( )19. Many students in this school make ________ a rule to come to the evening classes even on Saturday.
A．this B．that C．it D．them
( )20. I would appreciate ________，to be frank，if the goods could be delivered as soon as possible.
A．you B．this C．it D．myself
参考答案
1. A 当否定词语置于句首以表示强调时，句中的主谓须采用倒装结构。本题的正常语序是Parking is permitted in this area at no time.
2. D 当not until引导的时间状语或时间状语从句位于句首时，后面的主句要采用倒装结构，故首先排除选项A、B。选项C否定重复，错误。故应选D。正常语序为：They did not know a girl had been killed in it until they moved into the apartment.
3. D 否定副词如no, not，never, seldom，little，hardly, rarely，nowhere等位于句首时，句子要部分倒装。选项C动词时态与题干中所提供的时态(过去时)不符，故应排除。
4. B 如果句子将地点或时间状语提前，谓语动词为be, sit, go, come, lie, stand等，需要全部倒装。第二空格为that引导的同位语从句。
5. D 在否定词 no sooner…than…， hardly/ scarcely…when…等开头的关联结构中，主句部分必须采用部分倒装，连词than和when引导的从句采用正常语序。
6. D 因为地点状语down位于句首应该用完全倒装，整个谓语动词应位于主语之前。C项The woman falls down虽然语序正确，但时态错误，应该用和时间状语从句一致的过去时，而不是现在时。
7. C 在并列连词 not only…but also…引导的两个并列句中，not only 引导的句子必须采用部分倒装。
8. B 否定介词短语置于句首时，句子的主谓部分采用部分倒装。
9. B 第一空格重复上文内容“的确如此”，不倒装；第二空格表示“你也是”部分倒装。
10. C 省略了if (If she were to make preparations from now on)，将were提前，表示与将来事实相反的虚拟条件句。
11. A 副词only引导的状语或状语从句位于句首时，主句必须采用部分倒装，即将句子的助动词置于主语之前。
12. D 考查倒装句。具有否定意义的副词，如：little，seldom，never，hardly，scarcely，rarely等位于句首时，句子的主谓部分倒装。故选D。
13. D 前一分句为两个不同的谓语部分，其内容也适合于后一分句时，后一分句要用So it is/ was with sb./ sth. 或It is/ was the same with sb./ sth.来表达。C项时态错误。
14. B 句子的选项部分为对前面句子内容的肯定强调，意为“他的确这样做了”，故不能采用倒装结构。
15. C 分析该句结构，其正常语序应为： The construction robots are so clever that they may eventually reduce the amount of labor needed on construction sites by 90 percent.在由so…that…引导的结果状语从句中，当so 与其引导的形容词或副词一起置于句首时，必须采用部分倒装结构。
16. C 句意：我们已经明确表示强烈反对在办公室吸烟。it作形式宾语，that we are strongly against smoking in the office为真正宾语。
17. D 句意：“你为什么要制造这么大的噪音？”“我管不住自己。”can’t help it“没办法”。
18. A 句意：在中国高中生上大学似乎是场激烈的竞争。it作形式主语，to enter college or university是真正的主语。
19. C it作形式宾语，而to come to the evening classes是真正的宾语。
20. C 句意：坦白地说，如果这些货物能尽快发送的话，我将不胜感激。表示喜欢、憎恨等心理方面的动词如love，like，appreciate，hate等后加it作形式宾语，再加if/wh 从句作真正的宾语。2012届高考英语语法专题复习讲义荟萃记叙文型完形填空(三)
(一)
I stood by and watched her and her mother busily decorating her college dorm(宿舍). Everything was in place，__1__ boxes under the bed and photos of her dearest friends on the wall. I closely monitored that this time things were __2__ . I began to accept that her room at home is no longer __3__ . It is now ours，our room for her when she visits.
I __4__ myself thinking of when I held her in my arms sitting in a chair by my wife’s hospital __5__ . One day old. So small，so beautiful，so perfect，so totally reliant on her new，unrested parents. My wife changed from the day I drove this little baby home from the __6__ . I saw myself different that day，__7__.
The last few days __8__ she left for college，I touched her arm，her face—anything, __9__ that when my wife and I returned home，she would not be with us and there would be __10__ to touch. I had so much to say，but no words with which to say it.
My wife’s eyes followed her as she left us. Mine did not. I __17__ she hadn’t gone. I knew that the life she was going __18__ was exciting and wonderful. I remembered what the world looked like to me when everything was __19__ .
On the way back home，my eyes were wet，my heart sore，and I realized that my __20__ was changed forever.
( )1.A.with B．in C．by D．on
( )2.A.important B．enjoyable
C．convenient D．different
( )3.A.mine B．hers C．ours D．theirs
( )4.A.sent B．stopped C．found D．set
( )5.A.desk B．wall C．room D．bed
( )6.A.kindergarten B．hospital
C．school D．park
( )7.A.neither B．either
C．also D．too
( )8.A.before B．after
C．since D．when
( )9.A.wondering B．saying
C．knowing D．showing
( )10.A.nothing B．everything
C．anything D．something
( )11.A.observing B．catching
C．watching D．keeping
( )12.A.bad B．wrong
C．fine D．right
( )13.A.whole B．comfortable
C．difficult D．great
( )14.A.aware B．afraid
C．sure D．sorry
( )15.A.but B．for
C．so D．and
( )16.A.better B．tighter
C．happier D．nearer
( )17.A.imagined B．thought
C．guessed D．expected
( )18.A.across B．by
C．towards D．over
( )19.A.good B．bright
C．new D．perfect
( )20.A.life B．heart
C．dream D．belief
(二)
I returned to Abuja，the capital of Nigeria，after graduation. I had been there before my mother became a minister. Two weeks later，I told my mother I was bored. She said，“here’re the car keys. Go and buy some fruit.” __1__，I jumped into the car and speeded off.
Seeing me or rather my __2__，a boy sprang up(跳起来)，__3__ to sell his bananas and peanuts. “Banana 300 naira. Peanut 200 naira！” Looking at his black striped bananas，I __4__ to 200 total for the fruit and nuts. he __5__. I handed him a 500 naira note. he didn’t have __6__，so I told him not to worry. he was __7__ and smiled a row of perfect teeth.
When，two weeks later，I __8__ this same boy，I was more aware of my position in Nigerian society. I should __9__ this country as the son of a __10__. But it was hard to find pleasure in a place where it was so __11__ to see a little boy who should have been in school selling fruit.
“What’s up？” I asked. he answered in __12__ English，“I… I get no money to buy book.” I took out two 500 naira notes. he looked around __13__ before sticking his hand into the car __14__ the bills. One thousand naira means a lot to a family that __15__ only 50,000 each year.
( )1.A.Encouraged B．Disappointed
C．Delighted D．Confused
( )2.A.car B．mother
C．driver D．keys
( )3.A.willing B．afraid
C．eager D．ashamed
( )4.A.got down B．bargained down
C．put down D．took down
( )5.A.explained B．promised
C．agreed D．admitted
( )6.A.change B．notes
C．checks D．bills
( )7.A.troubled B．regretful
C．comfortable D．grateful
( )8.A.ran after B．ran into
C．ran over D．ran to
( )9.A.protect B．enjoy
C．help D．support
( )10.A.minister B．headmaster
C．manager D．president
( )11.A.lucky B．amazing
C．funny D．common
( )12.A.old B．broken
C．traditional D．modern
( )13. A.proudly B．madly
C．curiously D．nervously
( )14.A.for B．with
C．at D．upon
( )15.A.spends B．pays
C．makes D．affords
( )16.A.Possibly B．Actually
C．Certainly D．Fortunately
( )17.A.joys B．nuts
C．books D．bananas
( )18.A.asked B．imagined
C．reminded D．realized
( )19.A.when B．as if
C．even if D．after
( )20.A.send B．provide
C．sell D．give
参考答案
(一)
女儿上大学了，看着女儿跟她的母亲一起细心地整理自己的寝室，父亲不由得想起了许多往事，从初为人父的喜悦到送女儿上大学的酸楚，心中久久不能平静。但女儿面对的是灿烂的未来，心中虽有不舍，但也得主动适应新生活的变化。
1. A 根据上下文的结构，这里是考查“介词with十复合宾语”的结构，在这里作伴随状语，而其他介词均无此用法。
2. D 因为女儿要第一次离开家独自去大学生活，父亲感觉到情况跟以前不一样了。
3. B 女儿要离家去学校居住了，所以家中原来她自己的房间现在不再是她的了。
4. C I find myself doing…是一个常见句型，意思是“我情不自禁……”，其他动词均无此用法。
5. D 因为妻子是在医院生下女儿的，因此“我”是坐在妻子的床边。
6. B 上文已经提到妻子是在医院里生下女儿的，因此这里是指作者开车从医院接妻儿回家。
7. D 女儿来到了人世间，父亲当然也觉得从此自己的生活也将有新的内容了。
8. A 根据后面的意思，这里是指女儿离家上大学前，作者非常留恋地抚摸女儿。
9. C 因为知道女儿离开家了，以后想爱抚都没有爱抚的对象了，根据意思应该选择knowing“知道”。
10. A 承接上句“以后想爱抚女儿时都没什么可爱抚的了”，因此选择nothing。
11. B 这里意思是女儿突然抬起头，正好“逮着”父亲正呆呆地看着她。catch sb. doing“逮着某人正在做某事”。
12. C 因为知道父亲担心自己，所以女儿反过来安慰他“我会很好的”，选择fine符合句意。
13. D “我”告诉女儿她会度过灿烂的一年的。这里只有选择great才能形容度过一个灿烂或精彩的一年。whole没有任何感彩，comfortable“舒适的”，含义太清、太淡，difficult又不符合作者的本意。
14. B 除了祝福女儿外，“我”没有说其他什么话，因为“我”害怕会说一些自己感情不能控制的东西。根据意思这里应该选择afraid“害怕”。
15. C 考虑到这，所以“我”只是紧紧拥抱了女儿。选择so表示因果关系。
16. B 因为心中对女儿带着深深的不舍，所以只希望拥抱的时间更长、拥抱得更紧。
17. A 因为心中有太多的不舍，“我”没有目送女儿远走，“我”想象她还没走开。这里使用imagined是表示女儿没走开只是一种想象，thought和guessed表示的意思都是“认为”，含义不对，expected意思是“期待，估计”也不符合本意。
18. C 句意：我知道她将面对的生活是激动人心的、是无比精彩的，选择towards跟went构成短语，表示“走向……”。
19. C 这里是指作者又回忆起当时自己面对新生活时的模样，借此表示女儿将要面对新的生活。
20. A 走在回家的路上，作者感觉到自己的生活又将有一个新的变化。
(二)
这是一篇记叙型完形填空，作者通过描写自己与一位小男孩的偶然相遇以及对他的帮助告诉世人：爱是相互的，有付出就有回报。作者通过描写买水果、资助小男孩上学及小男孩回报这三件事，把整篇文章串起来。
1. C 从后句I jumped into the car and speeded off 可知“我”非常高兴，用 delighted。
2. A 上文提到“我”开车去买水果，所以当小男孩看到“我”，更确切地说是看到“我”的汽车，他跳了起来。
3. C 从上文小男孩的动作可知他非常渴望把香蕉和花生卖给作者，此处用 eager。
4. B 作为买主，在与小商贩打交道时，通常需要砍价。用bargain down讨价还价，符合语境。
5. C 卖方最后同意买方所出的价钱时，才可能成交，买方也才可能给他钱。
6. A 这里小男孩应该找给作者零钱change。
7. D 根据他找不开“我”的钱，“我”安慰他，不让他着急以及后文的 smiled a row of perfect teeth可以判断小男孩很感激。
8. B 句意为：“我”又与他不期而遇了，四个备选项中只有run into有此意义。
12. B 从小男孩的答语可知他说话结结巴巴。broken “不流利的，蹩脚的”符合题意。
13. D 如果一个人在做某件事情前先四下看一下，说明他紧张不安，恐怕被他人看到。
14. A 男孩向车里伸手，其目的就是拿作者给他的钱。for表目的。
15. C 一千奈拉对于每年收入仅仅五万奈拉的家庭来说意味着很多。本题所给四个选项中，只有 make有“获得，挣得”之意。
16. A but引出的句子表示转折，由此我们可以推测作者认为security officers所说的可能是对的。
17. C 上文提到小男孩说没钱买书，“我”资助了他1,000奈拉。现在“我”想知道他是否真的用这些钱买书了。
18. D 短暂的沉默之后，作者以为小男孩又来要钱，却不好意思开口。用realized“意识到”符合题意。
19. B 作者掏出500奈拉给小男孩，而他却往后退，好像受到了伤害似的。20. D 小男孩受过作者的恩惠，想把水果和花生送给作者作为报答。A项通常指不当面给，所以不能选。2012届高考英语语法专题复习讲义荟萃情景交际
( )1. — ________ were you so late this morning
—I forgot to set the alarm before going to bed last night.
A．how about B．Why
C．how come D．how
( )2. — Try this yellow shirt.
—________.
—how about the red one
—That’s OK.
A．But I don’t like the size
B．I like it very much
C．But I don’t like the color
D．I’ll take it
( )3. — I have got a cough and my chest hurts.
—________. Let me examine you.
A．Don’t mind
B．Take it easy
C．You should learn to protect yourself
D．Keep calm. You will recover soon
( )4. — ________ It will help you a lot.
—That’s a good idea. Let’s make some.
A．I promise to get you some coffee.
B．Would you please make me some coffee
C．Help yourself to some coffee.
D．You’d better have some coffee.
( )5. — The girl was punished too seriously.
—Yes，________.
A．but I think not
B．and I was afraid not
C．and I thought not
D．but I had thought not
( )7. — Well，my wife and daughter take great interest in most of the food on the menu.
— Thanks.________？
—Salad，fried fish，chips and orange juice，please.
A．Shall I take your order
B．At your service
C．Can I help you
D．What to follow
( )8. —My daughter has passed the exam.
—Congratulations! She’s really intelligent.
—________
A．No，no，she is nothing.
B．Oh，thank you.
C．Sometimes she is intelligent.
D．You are right.
( )9. —My children are always arguing.
—________
A．Just ignore them.
B．That’s all right.
C．Are you sure
D．How old are the boys
( )10. — Don’t forget to phone me when you get home. Just to let me know you’ve arrived safely.
—I won’t forget. Good bye then.
—________.
A．With pleasure B．have a nice trip
C．Don’t mention it D．It’s very kind of you
( )11. — Don’t forget to post the letter.
—________.
A．Yes，I will B．No，I won’t
C．I don’t think so D．Sorry，I wouldn’t
( )12. — What’s going on
—________
A．No，we won’t go on. We need rest.
B．The Times Theatre is on fire.
C．I’m going on telling the story.
D．How about some ice cream
( )13. — ________ that he came here yesterday
—By taxi.
A．How it was B．How was it
C．How are you D．How were you
( )14. — I’m sorry to hear that your mother is ill in hospital.
—________
A．That’s all right.
B．Don’t be so sorry. She’s well soon.
C．It’s nothing.
D．It’s very kind of you.
( )17. —I can not thank you enough for the gift you sent me.
—________.
A．No，thanks B．With pleasure
C．My pleasure D．Please don’t say so
( )18. —What do you think of that tea set as a gift for Mary’s birthday
—________，but I don’t particularly care for the design.
A．It’s the right thing
B．I think it’s a Chinese style
C．Not bad
D．Let me think it over once again
( )19. —Tom，I’ve lost my keys again.
—Here，not again! You________ your keys.
A．always lost
B．always lose
C．are always losing
D．have always been losing
( )20. —Bruce was killed in a traffic accident.
—________ I talked with him yesterday morning!
A．What a pity! B．I beg your pardon
C．Sorry to hear that. D．Is that so
参考答案
1. B 此题询问原因。why引导的特殊疑问句要用why＋一般疑问句。how come意为“怎么会；为什么”。如：how come you’re so late？你怎么会来得这么迟？how come后面接陈述语序。
2. C 由how about the red one 可知顾客不喜欢衬衫的颜色。
3. B 考查看病用语。在此take it easy是医生对病人的安慰，意为“别紧张；慢慢来”。
4. D had better表示提出建议，意思是“最好”。
5. D 答语表示同意上句的看法，并阐述自己的想法。此题通过对话考查think的过去完成时态表示与事实相反，译为“原以为”。句意：“那孩子被罚得太重了。”“是的，我原以为不是这样。”
6. B Maybe I should 是Maybe I should take a rest.的省略回答。
7. A 此题是就餐用语。首句表示顾客对食物的赞扬，第二句是服务员先表示感谢，再根据下句的内容，可知是让客人点菜。at your service意为“听您吩咐；随时提供方便”，不合题意。故答案为A。
8. B 回答祝贺、祝愿或赞扬时，可说 “Thank you.”或 “It’s very kind of you.”等。
9. A 答语应是提出建议。Just ignore them.意思是“别管他们”。
15. C 介绍用语及应答。Pleased to meet you也可用Nice/Glad to meet you, 意为“见到你很高兴”。
16. A 让对方重复其姓名，是因为没有听清(表示事实)；catch 此处意为“听清”。B项是干扰项。说话人要表述的是“刚才没有听清”，而不是“不能听清”。
17. C 上句意为“非常感谢你送给我的礼物”，下句答语该表达“不用谢，不客气”之类。With pleasure意为“很乐意”，是回答请求时的用语，不合题意。故答案选C。
18. C 答语中的but是关键词，答语意为“还不错，但不太喜欢它的样式。”
19. C always与进行时态连用表示厌恶、赞扬等感彩，意为“总是”。
20. D 答语的后半部分是感叹句，说明惊讶的原因；D项 “Is that so？”是用问句的语气表示惊讶；C项与后面的语气不一致，是干扰项2012届高考英语语法专题复习动词时态语态考点汇总
一般现在时用法
经常性或习惯性的动作，常与表示频度的时间状语连用。
时间状语： every…, sometimes, at…, on Sunday
I leave home for school at 7 every morning.
He cycles to work every day.
客观真理，客观存在，科学事实。
The earth moves around the sun.
Shanghai lies in the east of China.
Water boils at 100 centigrade degrees.
表示格言或警句中。
Pride goes before a fall. 骄者必败。
注意：此用法如果出现在宾语从句中，即使主句是过去时，从句谓语也要用一般现在时。
Columbus proved that the earth is round.
现在时刻的状态、能力、性格、个性。
I don't want so much.
Ann Wang writes good English but does not speak well.
一般现在时表将来：
1．下列动词：come, go, arrive, leave, start, begin, return的一般现在时表将来。这主要用来表
示在时间上已确定或安排好的事情。
The train leaves at six tomorrow morning.
When does the bus star It stars in ten minutes.
2. 倒装句，表示动作正在进行，
Here comes the bus. = The bus is coming.
There goes the bell. = The bell is ringing.
3. 在时间或条件状语从句中。
When Bill comes (不是will come), ask him to wait for me.
I'll write to you as soon as I arrive there.
4. 在动词hope, take care that, make sure that等后。
I hope they have a nice time next week.
Make sure that the windows are closed before you leave the room.
一般过去时的用法
在确定的过去时间里所发生的动作或存在的状态。 时间状语有：yesterday, last week, an hour ago, the other day, in 1982等。
Where did you go just now
I saw Tom in the street yesterday.
I bought this TV set in Beijing last year.
表示在过去一段时间内，经常性或习惯性的动作。
When I was a child, I often played football in the street.
He always went to work by bus.
He used to act like that.
用过去时表示现在，表示语气委婉礼貌。
动词want, hope, wonder, think, intend，情态动词 could, would等用过去式表示委婉。
Did you want anything else
I wanted to ask you about that.
Did you want to speak to me now
I wondered if you could help me.
Could you lend me your bike
4）用在条件句中表示与现在或将来事实不符的虚拟语气。
If I were a bird, I would fly to Beijing.
If he were here now, we could turn to him for help.
注意比较下列句型：
It is time sb. did sth. “时间已迟了；早该……了”：
It is time for you to go to bed. 你该睡觉了。
It is time you went to bed. 你早该睡觉了。
would (had) rather sb. did sth. 表示“宁愿某人做某事”：
I'd rather you came tomorrow.
一般过去时表示的动作或状态都已成为过去，现已不复存在。
Christine was an invalid（久病者） all her life. (含义：她已不在人间。)
Christine has been an invalid all her life. (含义：她现在还活着)
Mrs. Darby lived in Kentucky for seven years. (含义：达比太太已不再住在肯塔基州。)
Mrs. Darby has lived in Kentucky for seven years. ( 含义：现在还住在肯塔基州，有可能指刚离去)
一般将来时
shall用于第一人称，常被will 所代替。will 在陈述句中用于各人称，在征求意见时常用于第二人称。
Which paragraph shall I read first？
Will you be at home at seven this evening
be going to +不定式，表示将来。
a. 主语的意图，即将做某事或打算做某事。
What are you going to do tomorrow
b. 计划，安排要发生的事。
The play is going to be produced next month.
c. 有迹象要发生的事
Look at the dark clouds; there is going to be a storm.
be +不定式表将来，按计划或正式安排将发生的事。
We are to discuss the report next Saturday.
be about to +不定式，意为马上做某事
He is about to leave for Beijing.
注意：be about to 不能与tomorrow, next week 等表示明确将来时的时间状语连用。
be going to / will的用法之比较：
用于条件句时，be going to表将来，will表意愿。
If you are going to make a journey, you'd better get ready for it as soon as possible.
Now if you will take off your clothes, we will fit the new clothes on you in front of the mirror.
be to和be going to 的用法之比较：
be to 表示客观安排或受人指示而做某事。而be going to 则表示主观的打算或计划。
I am to play football tomorrow afternoon. (客观安排)
I'm going to play football tomorrow afternoon. (主观安排)
现在进行时
表示现在( 指说话人说话时) 正在发生的事情。
We are waiting for you.
习惯进行：表示长期的或重复性的动作，说话时动作未必正在进行。
Mr. Green is writing another novel. (说话时并未在写，只处于写作的状态。)
She is learning piano under Mr. Smith.
表示渐变的动词有：get, grow, become, turn, run, go, begin等。
The leaves are turning red.
It's getting warmer and warmer.
与always, constantly, forever 等词连用，表示反复发生的动作或持续存在的状态，往往带有说话人的主观色彩。
You are always changing your mind.
不用进行时的动词
事实状态的动词。have, belong, possess, cost, owe, exist, include, contain, matter, weigh, measure, continue
I have two brothers.
This house belongs to my sister.
心理状态的动词。know, realize, think see, believe, suppose, imagine, agree, recognize, remember, want, need, forget, prefer, mean, understand, love, hate
I need your help.
He loves her very much.
瞬间动词。accept, receive, complete, finish, give, allow, decide, refuse.
I accept your advice.
系动词。seem, remain, lie, see, hear, smell, feel, taste, get, become, turn
You seem a little tired.
过去进行时
过去进行时表示过去某时正在进行的状态或动作。
过去进行时的主要用法是描述一件事发生的背景；一个长动作发生的时候，另一个短动作发生。
常用的时间状语有：
this morning, the whole morning, all day yesterday, from nine to ten last evening, when, while
My brother fell while he was riding his bicycle and hurt himself.
It was raining when they left the station.
When I got to the top of the mountain, the sun was shining.
现在完成时
现在完成时的构成：助动词have (has) + 动词的过去分词。has 用于第三人称单数，have 用于其他所有人称。
现在完成时表示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。通常与表示包括现在在内的时间副词just，already, before, yet, never, ever等状语连用。
I have never heard of that before.
Have you ever ridden a horse
She has already finished the work.
Have you milked the cow yet Yes, I have done that already.
I’ve just lost my science book.
现在完成时表示过去已经开始，持续到现在,也许还会持续下去的动作或状态。可以和表示从过去某一时刻延续到现在（包括现在在内）的一段时间的状语连用。 for和since，以及 so far, now, today, this week(month, year) 等。
I haven’t seen her these days.
She has learnt English for 3 years.
They have lived here since 1990.
What has happened to the USA in the last 350 years
注意：表示短暂时间动作的词，如come, go, die, marry, buy等的完成时不能与for, since等表示一段时间的短语连用。
现在完成时还可以用在时间和条件状语从句中,表示将来某时完成的动作。
I’ll go to your home when I have finished my homework.
If it has stopped snowing in the morning, we’ll go to the park.
have been (to)和have gone (to)的区别：
have / has been (to) 表示“曾经去过”某地，说话时此人很可能不在那里，已经回来。侧重指经历。have / has gone (to) 表示某人“已经去了”某地，说话时此人在那里，或可能在路上，反正不在这里。
He has been to Beijing. 他曾去过北京。 （人已回来，可能在这儿）
He has gone to Beijing. 他已经去了北京。 （人已走，不在这儿）。
一般过去时与现在完成时的比较
过去时表示过去某时发生的动作或单纯叙述过去的事情，强调动作；现在完成时为过去发生的，强调过去的事情对现在的影响，强调的是影响。过去时常与具体的时间状语连用，而现在完成时通常与模糊的时间状语连用，或无时间状语。
一般过去时的时间状语有：yesterday, last week，…ago, in1980, in October, just now, 具体的时间状语。
共同的时间状语有：this morning, tonight, this April, now, once，before, already, recently，lately等。
现在完成时的时间状语有：for, since, so far, ever, never, just, yet, till / until, up to now, in past years, always, 等不确定的时间状语。
分析比较下列各例句：
I saw this film yesterday. （强调看的动作发生过了。）
I have seen this film. （强调对现在的影响，电影的内容已经知道了。）
She has returned from Paris. （她已从巴黎回来了。）
She returned yesterday. （她是昨天回来了。）
He has been in the League for three years. (在团内的状态可延续)
He joined the League three years ago. ( 三年前入团，joined为短暂行为。)
注意：句子中如有过去时的时间副词（如 yesterday, last week, in 1960）时，不能使用现在完成时，要用过去时。
（错）Tom has written a letter to his parents last night.
（对）Tom wrote a letter to his parents last night.
过去完成时的用法
过去完成时表示过去的过去。其结构是：had + 过去分词
过去完成时表示过去某一时刻或者某一动作之前完成的动作或状态；句中常用by, before, until, when等词引导的时间状语。
By the end of last year we had built five new houses.
I had learnt 5000 words before I entered the university.
过去完成时的动词还可以表示过去某一时刻之前发生的动作或者状态持续到过去某个时间或者持续下去。
Before he slept, he had worked for 12 hours.
在told, said, knew, heard, thought等动词后的宾语从句。
She said (that) she had never been to Paris.
在过去不同时间发生的两个动作中，发生在先，用过去完成时；发生在后，用一般过去时。
When the police arrived, the thieves had run away.
表示意向的动词，如hope, wish, expect, think, intend, mean, suppose等，用过去完成时表示“原本……，未能……”。
We had hoped that you would come, but you didn't.
过去完成时的时间状语before, by, until , when, after, once, as soon as。
He said that he had learned some English before.
By the time he was twelve, Edison had began to make a living by himself.
Tom was disappointed that most of the guests had left when he arrived at the party.
用一般过去时代替完成时的情况：
1. 两个动作如按顺序发生，又不强调先后，或用then，and，but 等连词时，多用一般过去时。
When she saw the mouse，she screamed.
My aunt gave me a hat and I lost it.
2. 两个动作相继发生，可用一般过去时；如第一个动作需要若干时间完成，用过去完成时。
When I heard the news, I was very excited.
3. 叙述历史事实，可不用过去完成时，而只用一般过去时。
Our teacher told us that Columbus discovered America in 1492.
过去将来时
过去将来时表示从过去的某一时间看将要发生的动作或存在的状态。它是一个相对的时态，即立足于过去某时，从过去的某一时间看即将发生的事情就要用这一时态。
He said his mother would buy a bike for him
My brother told me he wouldn’t believe Jack any more.
Would it be all right if he knew his illness
基本形式：would／should＋动词原形（其中 would 用于各种人称，should 常用于第一人称）。
They were sure they would win the final victory．他们坚信会赢得最后胜利。
He didn't expect that we should（would）all be there．他没想到我们都在那里。
上述两个例句中的宾语从句谓语 would win 和 should（would）be 分别与其主句谓语 were sure 和 didn't expect 相对应。
过去将来时的一些其它表达形式：
was／were＋going to＋动词原形
He said he was going to try． 他说他准备试试。
was／were＋to＋动词原形
They said the railway was to be opened to traffic on May Day．
他们说这条铁路将在五一节通车。
was／were about＋动词原形
We were about to go out when it began to rain． 我们正要出去天（突然）下起雨来。
过去进行时（一般多为动作概念较强的动词，如 go，come， leave，start， open，begin 等）也可用于表示将来。
I didn't know when they were coming again． 我不知道他们什么时候再来。
在时间和条件状语从句中，常用一般过去时来表示过去将来时。
He said he would come to see you when he had time． 他说他有时间就来看望你。
将来进行时
将来进行时概念：表示将来某时进行的状态或动作，或按预测将来会发生的事情。
She'll be coming soon.
I'll be meeting him sometime in the future.
将来进行时的用法：
1. 表示在将来某一时刻或某段时间正在进行的动作。
This time tomorrow I shall be flying to Guangzhou.
明天这个时候我将在飞往广州的途中。
What will you be doing at eight tomorrow morning
明天上午八点钟你将做什么
I hope you won't be feeling too tired.
我希望你不要太累。
We'll be watching television all evening.
我们整个晚上都将看电视。
2. 表示将来被客观情况所决定的动作或者按照安排将要发生的动作。
We'll be having tea after dinner as usual. 像通常一样，我们晚饭后将要喝茶。
The leaves will be falling soon. 树叶很快就会脱落。
We shall be having a meeting tomorrow morning. 我们明天要开一个会。
I’ll be taking my holidays soon. 我不久即将度假。
注意：将来进行时不用于表示"意志"，不能说 I'll be having a talk with her.
3. 将来进行时常用的时间状语：soon, tomorrow, this evening，on Sunday, by this time，tomorrow, in two days, tomorrow evening等。
By this time tomorrow, I'll be lying on the beach.
将来完成时
将来完成时用来表示在将来某一时间以前已经完成的动作或一直持续的动作。经常与“before+将来时间”或“by+将来时间”连用，也可与before或by the time引导的现在时的从句连用。
By the end of this week, I shall have finished the book.
到本周末，我将读完这本书。
By this time tomorrow they will have repaired the machine.
明天这时候，他们将修好这台机器。
The children will have gone to sleep by the time we get home.
到我们回家时，孩子们将已睡了。
When you come tonight at eight o'clock，I shall have written my paper.
你今晚八点钟来时，我将会写完文章了。
By next year our teacher will have taught English for twenty years.
到明年我们的老师将已教二十年英语了。
注意：将来完成时表示在将来某一时间以前已经完成或一直持续的动作或状态。使用这种时态时，多会涉及两个动作或状态，一个在前，一个在后；叙述前面的动作或状态，动词要用将来完成时；叙述后面的动作或状态，动词要用一般现在时。
We will have completed the work before you come.
He says that he will have graduated from a university before you return home.
现在完成进行时的用法
1. 表示动作从过去某一时间开始一直延续到现在。现在这个动作可能已经终止，也可能仍然在进行着。
I have been waiting for you for two hours.
我等了你两个小时。(动作不再延续下去)
It has been raining for three hours.
雨已经下了三个小时了。(动作可能延续)
“How long have you been learning English ” “I have been learning English for two years.”
你英语学多久了 ……我学了两年了。(动作可能延续)
“Why are you so dirty ” “I've been playing football.”
你身上怎么这样脏 ……我刚才踢足球了。(动作不再延续下去)
2. 有些不能用现在进行时态的动词，如be，have like，love，know，see，hear等，同样也不能用现在完成进行时，而只能用现在完成时。
She has been ill for a long time. 她已经病了好久了。
I have not seen you for ages. 我好久没有见到你了。
区别现在完成时和现在完成进行时
现在完成进行时是一兼有现在完成时和现在进行时二者基本特点的时态。由于它有现在完成时的特点，所以它可以表示某一动作对现在产生的结果或影响。由于它有现在进行时的特点，所以它也可以表示某一动作的延续性、临时性、重复性、生动性乃至感彩。
现在完成进行时和现在完成时皆可表示动作对现在产生的结果，但前者所表示的结果是直接的，而后者所表示的则是最后的结果。
We have been cleaning the classroom．我们打扫教室来着。 其直接结果可能是：我们身上都是灰。
We have cleaned the classroom．我们把教室打扫过了。 其结果是：现在教室很清洁，可以用了。
Be careful! John has been painting the door．
约翰刚刚把门油漆过，现在油漆还未干，所以你要小心。
John has painted the door．只表示John已经刷过门了，无此含义，
现在完成进行时有时有延续性，现在完成时往往没有。
They have been widening the road．意思是他们在加宽马路，但尚未完工。
They have widened the road．意思则是已完工了。
现在完成进行时往往表示动作在重复，现在完成时则常常不带重复性。
Have you been meeting her lately？（有“经常相会”之意。）
Have you met her lately？（只是问“见过”没有。）
Who's been eating my apples？ （有强烈的感彩，表示愤怒不满。有“苹果未被全部吃光”的意思。）
Who's eaten my apples？ （是完成时态，说明“苹果一个不剩了”。）
动词的语态
被动语态的构成：
be + 动词的过去分词。其中助动词be有时态、人称和数的变化，被动语态可用于各种时态中：
一般现在时的被动语态：主语+ am/is/are +过去分词
一般过去时的被动语态：主语+was/were +过去分词
一般将来时的被动语态：主语+ will/shall + be +过去分词
过去将来时的被动语态：主语+would +be +过去分词
现在完成时的被动语态：主语+ have/has +been +过去分词
过去完成时的被动语态：主语+had +been +过去分词
现在进行时的被动语态：主语 + am/is/are +being +过去分词
过去进行时的被动语态：主语+ was/were +being +过去分词
将来完成时的被动语态：主语 + will/shall +have +been +过去分词
被动语态的使用场合：
1. 当我们不知道动作的执行者或没有必要说出动作的执行者
Goodbyes were said. 彼此告别了（没必要指出谁对谁告别）。
2. 当更有必要强调动作的承受者时
Theories must be combined with practice.
理论必须联系实际（强调理论联系实际，不强调谁联系）。
3. 由于某种理由（如为了礼貌、婉转或便于组合句法关系）而需要使用被动语态
You are expected to finish it in time. 希望你及时把它完成。
被动语态和系表结构的区别：
被动语态表示的是动作，句子中的主语是动作的对象，句中可以用介词 “by”所引导的短语。而系表结构则表示主语的特点或所处的状态，一般没有介词“by”所引导的短语。
The book was written by a young writer. 这本书是一位青年作者写的（被动语态）。
The book is well written. 这本书写得很好（系表结构）。
表达被动意义的主动结构：
1. 可和well, easily等副词连用的不及物动词，如sell, wash, write, read, clean, cook等。
The new product sells well. 这新产品很畅销。
Your composition reads well. 你的作文读起来很好。
The pen writes well. 这钢笔好写。
2. 连系动词taste, smell, sound, prove, feel, look, become, grow, turn, remain, stay, keep等。
The flowers smell sweet. 这些花闻起来甜甜的。
The theory proved to be correct. 这个理论证明是正确的。
3. 某些动词、短语和句型中：last, happen, take place, break out, belong to, need/want/require doing sth., be worth doing, be to blame等。
Great changes have taken place in my hometown. 我的家乡已发生了巨大的变化。
It is known that Taiwan belongs to China. 众所周知，台湾属于中国。
The accident happened yesterday. 事故发生在昨天。
The meeting lasted four hours. 会议持续了四个小时。
I am to blame. 应当责备我。
The book is worth reading. 这本书值得读。
The computer requires/ wants/ needs repairing. 电脑需要修理了。
易错点点拨：
1. 延续动词与瞬间动词用于完成时的区别：延续动词表示经验、经历； 瞬间动词表示行为的结果，不能与表示段的时间状语连用。
He has completed the work. 他已完成了那项工作。 (表结果)
I've known him since then. 我从那时起就认识他了。(表经历)
2. 用于till / until 从句的差异：延续动词用于肯定句，表示“做……直到……” ；瞬间动词用于否定句，表示“到……，才……”。
He didn't come back until ten o'clock. 他到10 点才回来。
He slept until ten o'clock. 他一直睡到10点。
3. 被动结构表示主动含义： get married 结婚；be addicted to sth.沉溺于；be seated 坐着；be lost in thought沉思着；be devoted to sth.投身于，专注于；be interested in sth.对某事物感兴趣；be surprised 感到吃惊。2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义特殊句型
Was it on a lonely island ______ he was saved one month after the boat went down？(2011·四川卷15)
A. where B. that C. which D. what
【解析】选B。该句为含强调句型的一般问句。强调了地点状语on a lonely island，不能选where。它不是定语从句。该句可以还原为一个陈述句：He was saved one month after the boat went down on a lonely island.
考点1.强调句型的基本结构
Is ______ three hours ______ the boy ______ family is poor to come to school on foot
A. it; that; whose B. it; that it takes; whose
C. it for; that it takes; whose D. it; when; that
强调句型
特殊句型主要涉及强调句型、倒装句及省略句。
【解析】选B。这是一个强调句，强调作宾语的时间名词three hours, the boy后接一个定语从句， whose作定语修饰family。句意：那位家境贫寒的男孩花了三个小时徒步来到学校吗？
强调句型的基本结构是： It + be +被强调部分+ that(who)…。
强调句的一般疑问句形式为： Is(Was)+被强调部分+that/who…？
强调句的特殊疑问句形式为： Who/When/Where/Why + is (was) it that…？
强调句若以特殊疑问句形式出现，很容易误解。比较：
Why is it that he can't come 他为什么不能来？
What is it that he wants to buy 他想要买什么？
以上两句可视为由以下陈述句转换而来：
It is because he is ill that he can't come.
It is a computer that he wants to buy.
温馨提示：当强调人时，可用who代替其中的that, 当强调时间和地点时，不能用when和where代替that。
考点2. not… until用于强调句
It was not until ______ that I knew the truth. (2011·四川成都外国语学校高三第三次月考卷)
A. you told me B. did you tell me C. had you told me D. you have told me
【解析】选A。该句强调了not until you told me。在强调not until句型时要将not 与until放在一起，并且语序不变。
其基本形式为It is (was) not until … that …。
It was not until yesterday that we knew about it.
直到昨天我们才知道这件事。
考点1.部分倒装
My father and my mother have been married for 30 years, and never once ______ with each other.(福建省三明二中2011高三二模卷)
A. have they quarreled B. they have quarreled
C. did they quarrel D. had they quarreled
【解析】选A。表否定意义的副词放于句首时后引起部分倒装。即：否定意义副词＋助动词＋主语＋动词。
倒装句
部分否定即将主语与助动词倒置，其结构与疑问句大致相同。构成部分倒装的主要情形有：
1. 含否定意义的词(如： never, hardly, seldom, little, few, not until, not, not only, no sooner, not a single …， no longer, nowhere, by no means, at no time, neither, nor等)置于句首时，其后用部分倒装。
2. so表示前面所说的情况也适合于另一个人或物时，意为“……也一样”， 用“so+助动词+主语”这样的倒装句式。若讲述的情况属于同一个人或物时，意为“……的确如此”， 主谓不倒装。要注意如果一个并列句中含有两个性质不同的谓语，另一个省略的倒装结构要用“So it is/was with sb./sth.”或 “It is/was the same with sb./sth.”来表示。
3. only加状语(即： only+副词/介词短语/状语从句等)放在句首时，其后用部分倒装。
4. 当虚拟条件句含有were, should, had时，可省略if, 将were, should, had置句首。
5. so / such … that结构中，将so / such … 置于句首时，主句要用部分倒装。
考点2.完全倒装
Out ______， still discussing the fashion show with great interest. (江苏南京金陵中学高三第4次模拟卷)
A. walked a crowd of young girls
B. did a crowd of young girls walk
C. were walking a crowd of young girls
D. a crowd of young girls were walking
【解析】选A。方位副词out 放于句首，后用全部倒装。即谓语动词全部在主语之前。
完全倒装即将谓语移到主语前。构成完全倒装的情形主要有：
1. 以now, then, here, there, out, in, up, down, off, away等副词开头的句子，且句子主语是名词时，句子常用完全倒装。若主语为代词，则不用倒装。
2. 将表语和地点状语(多为介词短语)置于句首加以强调时，其后通常用倒装语序。
考点3.另类倒装
— That boy enjoys drawing very much.
— ______， I have never seen anyone else who is as enthusiastic about drawing as he is.
A. As long as I have traveled B. Traveled so much as I have
C. As I have traveled so much D. Much as I have traveled
【解析】选D。as引导的让步状语从句中，可将副词提前至句首。
1. as引导的让步状语从句中，必须将表语、状语或动词原形提到as前面。若提前的表语是名词，一般不用冠词。
2. 当such用作表语时，通常采用倒装语序。
3. 有时为了强调，可将谓语部分的分词或不定式置于句首，从而构成倒装。
省略句
例1：It sounds like something is wrong with the car's engine. ______， we'd better take it to the garage immediately. (2011·江苏卷33)
A. Otherwise B. If not C. But for that D. If so
【解析】选D。if so ＝if it is so。it代指It sounds like something is wrong with the car's engine. 这件事。
例2：— Will he fail in the exam
— ______.
A. Don't hope to B. Let's hope not C. Not hope so D. Let's hope not to
【解析】选B。考查用so, not省略前面提到的事，表肯定与否定。so可代替单词、词组、句子，作believe, do, expect, guess, hope, fear, imagine, suppose, think等词的宾语；not代替否定的句子，用法与so相似。根据句意“(让)我们希望他考试不要失败”和语法规则，为了不重复别人的话，表示否定意义时， hope只用(I) hope not的形式。
1. 在时间、条件、让步等状语从句中，当从句的主语跟主句的主语一致时，从句的主语可以省略，同时将从句的谓语动词变成分词形式。
2. 在时间、地点、条件、让步等状语从句中，当从句的主语跟主句的主语一致或从句的主语是it, 谓语是be动词时，从句的主语、谓语可省略。如when/if necessary。
3. 当句子的谓语部分省略时，若只用代词代替句子，则用代词的宾格形式。
4. 当省略不定式的内容时，则须保留小品词to。2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义动词时态与语态
1. In 1492, Columbus ______ on one of the Bahama Islands, but he mistook it for an island off India. (2011·湖南卷27)
A. lands B. landed C. has landed D. had landed
【解析】选B。本题考查时态中的一般过去时，强调过去某个时间里发生的动作或状态。句意：1492年，哥伦布曾在巴哈马群岛中的一个岛屿登陆，但是他误以为是印度边缘的一个岛屿。题干给出具体的过去时间in 1492，所以排除A和D。干扰项C现在完成时表示过去发生并且已经完成的动作对现在造成影响或后果，此题表达的重点是哥伦布过去登陆了这个岛，并不强调对现在的影响。
2. In the near future, more advances in the robot technology ___ by scientists. ( 2011·湖南卷34)
A. are making B. are made
C. will make D. will be made
【解析】选D。本题考查动词的时态及语态。句意：在不久的将来，科学家将会使机器人技术更加先进。主语是more advances，时间是in the near future，所以动作一定是发生在将来，又因为主语被提到了前面，“进步”是被取得的，所以句子需要用被动语态。故选D。
英语中，动词有十六种时态，而湖南高考要求考生掌握十种时态，它们是：一般现在时、一般过去时、一般将来时、现在进行时、过去进行时、过去将来时、将来进行时、现在完成时、过去完成时以及现在完成进行时。
动词的时态
考点1.一般现在时与现在进行时
Planning so far ahead ______ no sense — so many things will have changed by next year. (2011·全国新课标卷23)
A. made B. is making C. makes D. has made
【解析】选C。句意：提前这么早计划没有意义，第二年这么多事情将会发生变化。此项用一般现在时表明这一客观事实。选项A一般过去时，选项B现在进行时，选项D现在完成时都与接下来的一句语境不符。
一般现在时表示经常性、习惯性或不依时间的变化而发生变化的动作。时刻表上安排的将要进行的事情也可用一般现在时表示。
现在进行时表示现在正在进行的动作，或现阶段一直进行的动作。非持续性动词(如： go, come, leave, die 等)的现在进行时表示将要发生的动作。
温馨提示：
(1)在以when, until (till), as soon as, by the time, after, before等引导的时间状语从句或以if, unless, once等引导的条件状语从句以及由no matter when, however, even if等引导的让步状语从句中，如果主句中的动词用一般将来时，从句中的动词通常用一般现在时代替一般将来时。
(2)always, often, constantly, frequently, forever等副词和现在进行时连用，表达说话人的某种感情，即“赞扬”或“厌恶”等，可译为“老是、总是”。
(3)某些动词的现在进行时可表示计划或安排好了的将来动作。常见的这类动词有： go, come, leave, arrive, start, take off等。
考点2. 现在完成时与一般过去时
It is the most instructive lecture that I ______ since I came to this school. (2011·湖南卷30)
A. attended B. had attended C. am attending D. have attended
【解析】选D。句意：自从我来了这所学校以后，这是我听过的最有教育意义的一场讲座。这里考查了定语从句和时态两个知识点。因为前面的谓语动词是is，并且谈论的是从过去开始持续到现在的一段时间里发生的动作，所以用现在完成时。故选D。
现在完成时强调过去发生的事情一直延续到现在的情况，或者过去发生的事情对现在的影响或结果。属于现在时态的范畴。表示延续性的动作时常用“since+时间点/for+时间段”作状语；而表示非持续性的动作时常用副词already, yet, ever, just, never等作状语。
一般过去时表示在过去时间里已经发生的动作，常与过去时间状语yesterday, last week, in 2003, three days ago等连用。
相同点：都表示动作发生在过去。
不同点：现在完成时表示与现在有关；一般过去时表示与现在无关。
温馨提示：(1)比较、区别have gone to(去了)与have been to(去过)的不同用法。
(2)现在完成时一般不与具体的过去时间状语或when连用。
(3)短暂性动词的完成时一般不与段时间状语连用。
(4)在It / This / That is the first / second time (that) …结构中， that引导的从句常用现在完成时。
考点3.过去进行时与一般过去时
— That must have been a long trip.
— Yeah, it ______ us a whole week to get there. (2011·北京卷27)
A. takes B. has taken C. took D. was taking
【解析】选C 。 根据上句must have been可知trip发生在过去，因此第二句选用一般过去时took。句意：——那一定是一次长久的旅行。——是啊，我们花了整整一星期才到达那儿。
过去进行时表示在过去某一时刻或过去某一段时间正在进行的动作，常与时间状语this time last year, that time, last night或由when, while, as 引导的时间状语从句等连用。
温馨提示：过去进行时与副词always, constantly, continually, forever等连用时表示赞美或讨厌的感彩。
考点4. 过去完成时与一般过去时
By the time Jack returned home from England, his son ______ from college.(2011·辽宁卷34)
A. graduated B. has graduated C. had been graduating D. had graduated
【解析】选D。从句动作是过去时，主句动作发生在过去的过去，因此用过去完成时。
过去完成时表示过去某时间或某动作之前已经发生的事情或存在的状态，即：过去的过去。持续性动词的过去式常与since+时间点、for+时间段、when/before+过去时的从句、by/before+过去时间等状语连用。
温馨提示：(1)动词expect, hope, suppose, think, want等的过去完成时表示过去未曾实现的希望、计划或打算等。
(2)过去完成时用于某些特殊结构
① It / This / That was the first / second time (that)+过去完成时
② It was+段时间+since+过去完成时
③ no sooner …than …或hardly …when …的主句谓语要用过去完成时
④ 含“by+过去时间点”或“by the time+一般过去时”的句子常用过去完成时
考点5.现在完成时与现在完成进行时
— You look so tired, what have you been doing
— We have been discussing the problem but we ______ a conclusion yet.
A. haven't drawn B. have been drawing
C. didn't draw D. weren't drawing
【解析】 选A。根据前后语境可知，到目前为止我们还没有达成结论，尽管我们到现在为止一直在讨论问题。yet一般与完成时连用。
现在完成进行时由“have/has + been+现在分词”构成，表示从过去某个时候开始一直延续到现在的动作；现在完成时表示动作已完成。
考点6.一般将来时与将来进行时
— I hear you ______ in a pub. What's it like
— Well, it's very hard work and I'm always tired, but I don't mind. (2011·江苏卷21)
A. are working B. will work
C. were working D. will be working
【解析】选A。 句意：——我听说你在一个酒吧干活。工作怎样？——哦，工作很艰难，我总是累的，但我不介意。此句用进行时表明一段时间在进行的动作。如果选用将来时或将来进行时的话，那么就不会出现下一个对话情景。选C过去进行时，与下句太不符合。
一般将来时表示将来某个时间要发生的动作或存在的状态，或在现在看来即将要发生的动作或存在的状态，常与时间状语tomorrow, next week, in a few days等连用。
将来进行时表示将来某时间正在发生的动作，或将来某时间可能会发生的事情。
一般将来时强调打算、计划、安排，而将来进行时强调客观的可能性或主观的决心、意志。
温馨提示：will / shall与be going to的区别：
① be going to可用于条件状语从句表示将来，而shall / will一般不可。
② 迹象表明要发生某事，只用be going to。
③ 若强调某个意图是经过事先考虑好的，用be going to；说话时的临时决定，则用will / shall。
动词的语态
考点1.两种特殊的被动语态
1. 双宾语动词的被动语态
She was ______ the bike for 25 dollars，but she wouldn't take it.
A. provided B. supplied
C. offered D. gave
【解析】选C。 offer 作“出价，开价”讲，常有offer sb. money for sth.和offer sb. sth. for money两种搭配。此处是将后者用于被动语态中。
英语中有些动词可以有两个宾语，如： give, buy, bring, show, pass, offer, lend, leave, tell, write, sing, teach等，这些动词用于被动结构时，可以将其中任何一个宾语变为主语，而另一个宾语仍保留在谓语后面。如： He bought me many books. → I was bought many books. 或 Many books were bought for me.
2. 短语动词的被动语态
— Why does Lingling look so unhappy
— She ______ by her classmates.
A. has laughed
B. has laughed at
C. has been laughed
D. has been laughed at
【解析】选D。由by短语可知该用被动语态，即可排除A、B。laugh是不及物动词，没有被动语态，而laugh at才是及物动词短语，可用被动语态。
短语动词是由“动词+介词”， “动词+名词+介词”等结构构成的动词短语，在被动语态结构中，不能漏掉其后的介词。在“动词＋名词＋介词”这类动词短语的被动结构，“名词＋be＋动词过去分词＋介词”也是高考热点。如：take care of→care be taken of; make good use of→good use be made of; take advantage of→advantage be taken of。
考点2.主动表被动的若干情形
— Shall we go fishing tomorrow
— Sounds great, but with so much homework ______， I really can't afford the time.
A. done B. to do
C. being done D. doing
【解析】选B。“with+宾语+不定式”结构中的不定式表示将来，且常用主动表被动。
1. 系动词(如look, sound, smell, feel, taste, prove等)要用主动表被动。
2. 英语中有些动词如： open, close, shut, lock, move, read, wash, clean, cook, cut, wear, carry等，当主语是物，且又表示主语的特征和状态时，要用主动形式表被动含义。
3. 不定式to blame用作表语，通常用主动表被动。
4. “主语+be+形容词+to do”结构中的不定式通常要用主动形式表示被动意义。这类形容词常见的有： convenient, comfortable, dangerous, difficult, hard, easy, impossible, interesting, nice, pleasant, safe, tough, tricky, unpleasant等。
5. 不定式用于某些动词(如： have, get, want, need等)的宾语后作定语时，如果不定式的逻辑主语是句子的主语，通常用主动形式表示被动意义。
温馨提示：若不定式的逻辑主语不是句子的主语，则应用被动式。
6. 在“with+宾语+不定式”结构中，不定式表示将来的动作，且其逻辑主语是句子的主语，该不定式常用主动表被动。
7. be worth后的动名词要用主动表被动。
温馨提示：be worthy却不一样，其后常接不定式的被动式或of+动名词的被动式。
8. 表示“需要”的动词need, want, require或动词deserve(“应受，应得，值得”)后的动名词用主动式表被动意义。但这些动词后的动名词若改为不定式则要用被动式表被动。
考点3.不及物动词和有些及物动词(短语)无被动语态
Great changes ______ in the city and a lot of factories ______.
A. have been taken place; have been set up
B. have taken place; have been set up
C. are taken place; are set up
D. were taken place; were set up
【解析】选B。 take place 为不及物动词短语，一般不用被动语态，即可排除A、C、D。
常见的没有被动语态的动词(短语)有： occur, take place, happen, break out, belong to, appear, disappear, cost, last, agree with等。
考点4. 作状语的动词被动语态
If they win the final tonight, the team are going to tour around the city ______ by their enthusiastic supporters. (2011·浙江卷19)
A. being cheered B. be cheered
C. to be cheered D. were cheered
【解析】选C。 考查非谓语动词，因此首先排除B和D(前面已经有are going to tour，又没有连词，不可能出现两个独立谓语)。A和C都表示被动，区别在于being done表示正在被发生的动作，而动词不定式to be done表示具体、一次性、将要被发生的动作。句意：如果他们今晚赢得了决赛，整队将在热情的粉丝欢呼下周游这个城市。这里用to be done表示伴随。
考点5. 作后置定语的动词被动语态
The Town Hall ______ in the 1800's was the most distinguished building at that time.
A. completing
B. completed
C. having been completed
D. to have been completed
【解析】选B。 completed作后置定语修饰the Town Hall, 表被动完成。相当于定语从句which/ that was completed。选C错误，因为现在分词完成时不能作限定性后置定语。
考点6. “get/become及其他系动词＋过去分词”表示被动，构成系表结构
They got ______ after returning from the big party last week.
A. separate B. separating
C. separated D. to separate
【解析】选C。 get ＋过去分词为固定系表结构。get separated (分离)。类似结构还有get dressed“穿着”， get married“结婚”， get changed “换衣服”等等。
考点7.形式被动意义表主动的短语一般都由“be ＋v. ed＋介词或少量的不定式”组成，如be faced with(面临)，be determined to do(下决心干)，be caught in(遇上), be devoted to (致力于), be known for(因……出名)，be lost in(陷于，埋头于) 等等。在句中作状语时只需去掉be。
______ to achieve high grades in the final examination, he tried to study harder and harder.
A. Being determining B. Determined
C. To determine D. Determine
【解析】选B。 be determined to do作状语时，be去掉。
考点8. 带复合宾语的动词被动语态结构
The missing girl was last seen ______ under the big tree.
A. read B. to read
C. reading D. to be reading
【解析】选C。由句中语境可知空白处表示的是当时的现场情景，动作正在发生。故用reading作主补。带复合宾语的动词变为被动时，一般将主动结构中的宾语变为被动结构中的主语，宾语补足语不变。宾语补足语可以是现在分词结构，表明动作正在发生，也可以是动词不定式结构表明动作已发生，强调动作发生的全过程。
考点9.当句子的谓语为say, believe, report, expect, think, know, consider, suggest等动词时，被动语态有两种形式①谓语动词用被动语态，动词不定式作主补，②用it作形式主语，真正主语在后面用主语从句来表示。类似句型有：It is said/ reported/ believed/ known/ suggested/ considered/ hoped/ thought …that…
The crowd cheered wildly at the sight of Bolt at the Bird's Nest, who was reported ______ the world record in the running races.
A. breaking B. having broken
C. to have broken D. to break
【解析】选C。 表示据报道用“be reported ＋不定式”。此处用不定式完成时表动作已发生。此句中的后一分句我们也可以这样改写：It was reported that Bolt had broken the world record in the running races.2012届高考英语语法专题复习经典讲义过去分词归纳
I．形式和性质：
1．过去分词只有一种形式，即V-ed。没有所谓的“一般体”“进行体”与“完成体”之分。过去分词也没有“主动式”与“被动式”之称谓。
2．过去分词一般有以下特征：
2．1 被动性：过去分词的逻辑主语是分词动作的承受者（receiver）, 而不是发出者（doer）。
2．2 完成性： 与句中另一个动作、另一个时间或句子产生的时间相比，分词的动作往往先已发生。
〖分析〗1. The injured man （=The man who had been injured）was sent to hospital without delay.
2. This is the book borrowed (= which was borrowed) from the school library last week.
3. Done in a hurry(Because it had been done in a hurry), Tom's homework was full of mistakes and errors.
〖例外〗1. 在使役动词后作宾补的过去分词和带有将来时间状语的分词不具完成 性。如：
I'll have my house enlarged.
The car repaired this afternoon belongs to one of my friends.
2. 一些不及物动词的过去分词作定语时，不具被动性。
An old man was collecting the fallen leaves in the yard.
The police were searching for the escaped man.
II. 句法功能
1. 主语
过去分词前加上定冠词可用作主语，表示一个类别的人（事物）。如：
The accused have been acquitted.
The wounded were left hidden in that village .
这种用法时，谓语一般用复数动词，但在上下文明确时也可能用于指一类中的个别，用单数动词。如：
The deceased is his father.
The wounded is a policeman.
2. 宾语
过去分词前加上定冠词可用作宾语，也表示一个类别的人（事物）。如：
Everyone in our society should respect and help the disabled.
Listen to the voice of the oppressed .
3．表语
The boys were astonished.
The door remained locked.
They seemed worried.
He is well known to us all.
4．定语
4.1 前置定语由单个分词充当
The broken glass is still lying on the table.
The frightened girl was trembling when the police arrived.
This sort of people seems not to be able to live in the changed world.
He only collects used stamps.
This phrase is often used in spoken English.
A grown boy is a boy who has physically and mentally grown up.
The risen sun is the sun that has risen high.
That was a man-made satellite.
He sent they his newly-invented devices.
4.2 后置定语由分词短语充当
She was reading a novel written by Dickens.
He works and lives in a school surrounded by green trees.
The people trapped in the big fire were rescued by the firefighters with a helicopter.
The radio bought in your shop doesn't work well.
The Braille is a language used for the blind.
偶尔也有单个分词作后置定语的情况。如：
Things seen are mightier than things heard.
有时单个分词作前置定语与作后置定语的意义不同。如：
The car used was a stolen one. (The car which was used at the time…)
The used car was still in the garage.( The old car which didn't work well… )
5．宾补
5.1 在感觉 / 知动词后：see, look at, observe, hear, listen to, think, find, imagine, feel, watch等。
We found him greatly changed.
Everyone thought the battle lost except the general.
He felt himself carried onto a carriage .
I have never heard a single French word spoken before.
The worst part was watching her wheeled away to an operating theatre while we waited and stared at the walls. (Collins GP1:Verbs, P.308)
5.2 在使役动词后： make, have, get, keep, leave等。
He tried to make yourself understood in his broken English.
I had my bad tooth pulled out yesterday.
Last month the family got a new house built.
It's very important for you to keep your parents informed of your situation.
He left the food untouched and went out.
5.3在意愿动词后： like, need, want, order, wish等。
He won't like the problem discussed at the meeting.
They were arrested by immigration officials on Monday just hours after a High Court judge had ordered them freed from detention. (Collins GP1:Verbs, P.306)
She came into the shop with a package saying: "I don't need it changed, only re-wrapped."
The king ordered the magic cloth woven at once.
I want the case investigated further to make every detail clear.
6．状语
6.1 方式和伴随情况 ( of manner or accompaniment )
He walked around outside, disturbed by the news.
The teacher went out, followed by some pupils.
The old man sat on the chair, lost in thought.
Three large men rushed out of the house, armed with guns and knives.
Supported by a girl, the old lady got off the bus.
表示方式的as if 和as though 可与过去分词连用。如：
He walked back as if hurt in the leg.
6.2 条件 (of condition)
Heated to a high temperature, water changes into vapor.
Given more time, we could do it better.
Criticized by someone else, she could not have got so angry.
Painted white, the house will appear nicer.
表示条件的过去分词可与连词if 和unless 连用。
I will not go to Tom's party unless invited.
I'll tell everything to the police if questioned about that.
6.3原因和理由 (of reason or cause)
Done in a hurry, Tom's exercise was full of mistakes.
Made of glass, the test tubes are easy to break.
Wounded badly, he was sent to hospital.
Tired with the trip, they went to bed early.
Shocked by the sudden attack of the German army, the Poland Government was at a loss what to do.
表示原因的分词没有相应的连词可用。但有人认为since 有时可以接V-ed分词。
6.4 时间 (of time)
Dismissed by the boss of the hotel, John never got a job.
Questioned by the police, the man was very much afraid.
Carried towards the hospital the victim died from bleeding too much.
表示时间的分词可以与when, while, once, whenever，until 等连词连用，以使意义更为明确。
When asked by the teacher, he stood up and made no answer.
I'll never speak to Jack until spoken to first.
Once recognized, we can not avoid being caught.
Whenever needed, I will come to your help.
The necklace must be returned to you whenever found.
6.5 让步（of concession）
Badly wounded in the leg, the soldier refused to withdraw.
Protected by 3 fences, Robinson Crusoe still felt unsafe.
表示让步的分词可与though, although 和even if / though 连用。如：
Though surrounded for 5 days, our soldiers were not discouraged.
Even if not invited, he went along to the evening party.
6.6 地点 （of place）
过去分词只有与where或wherever连用，才可以表示地点。
Rats should be killed wherever found.
Young students should go and work where needed.
III. 过去分词在独立结构中的使用
Our house painted white, we like it better.
All things considered, they set to work.
The key to the house left in the office, he had to fetch it.
The conference finished, Mr. Brown hurried home directly2012届高考英语语法专题复习定语从句易错题专练
详解试题
1. The headmaster hurried to the concert hall only _________ the speaker
【译文】 校长匆匆来到音乐大厅，结果发现演讲者早已走了。
A. to find； left B. to find； gone
C. finding； left D. finding； gone
【答案及简析】 B。 不定式表结果时,常指出人意料的结果。第二个考察点是find+宾语+形容词(补语)，表状态。
2. —I failed again. I wish I _________ harder.?—But you _________.
【译文】 ——我又失败了。我真该努力学习。——但是你没有哇。
A. had worked； hadn’t B. worked； don’t
C. had worked； didn’t D. worked； didn’t
【答案及简析】 C。 第一空表达与过去事实相反的愿望,所以用过去完成时态表虚拟语气。第二空说明过去的事实,用一般过去时态。
3. It was not until liberation that _________ to his hometown.
【译文】 直到解放他才回到家乡。
A. did he return B. was he returned
C. he did return D. he returned
【答案及简析】 D。 此句为强调结构： It is/was…that…强调之前的句子为： He didn’t returnedto his hometown until liberation.要注意not…until…句型变成强调句后的not的位置。
4. —I?d like a pen which _________ well.—Will this one _________
【译文】 ——我很想又一只好写的笔。 ——这只笔如何？
A. writes； do B. writes； work
C. is written； do D. is written；work
【答案及简析】 A。 此处write作不及物动词,表事物的性质,类似词： sell，wash等。第二句用do来代替上句的write well。
5. －－Shall we meet right now ?－－Sorry. I’m too busy to _______ for the moment.
【译文】 －－我们可以马上见面吗？ －－对不起，此刻我忙得抽不开身。
A. get through B. get away
C. get off D. get together
【答案及简析】 B。 只要你记住"限数描大形,新色国材名"这句话,此题就迎刃而解。
6. _________ is known to all，good friends _________ happiness and value to life.?
【译文】 众所周知，好朋友给说增添快乐和价值。
A. It； add B. As； add
C. It； add up D. As； add to
【答案及简析】 B。 as引导的定语从句修饰整个主句； add to sth."使增加,使增强"； add sth to sth. "把……加到……里边"； add up to"总计是……"。因句中已有介词to,所以只能选B。
7. Good food，not _________，that’s how one gets fat.
【译文】 食物好，锻炼少，这就是一个人长胖的原因。
A. enough exercises B. exercises enough
C. enough exercise D. exercise enough
【答案及简析】 C。 enough修饰名词时只能放在其修饰的名词前,而修饰形容词时要放在后"锻炼"之意；用作复数名词时为"体操""运动"。而这里应该是"锻炼"的意思。面。exercise作不可数名词时为“训练”。
8. It was the very place _________ the soldiers fought over sixty years ago.?
【译文】 这就是战士们60多年前战斗过的地方。
A. that B. which
C. where D. there
【答案及简析】 C。 定语从句。the very place 在从句中充当地点状语。
9. -You must be excited about going to Japan for schooling.? -_________，but I’m afraid I can’t do well because my Japanese is poor.
【译文】 到日本去读书，你一定很激动。 ——喔，我应该激动。但日语不好，我会担心做不好的。
A. Never mind B. Well，I ought to
C. I don’t know yet D. Certainly not
【答案及简析】 B。 应为I ought to be excited about…Never mind用来回答道歉语，Certainly not用来回答别人的请求和询问等。
10. The new machine，if _________ properly，will work at least ten years.
【译文】 如果是用得当，这台新机器会使用10年的。
A. use B. using
C. being used D. used
【答案及简析】 D。 本题考查分词与主语之间的关系。"if the new machine is used properly…"
强化练习
1. All of the flowers now raised here have developed from those _______ in the forest.
A. once they grew B. they grew once
C. they once grew D. once grew
2. In the office I never seem to have time until after 5:30 pm, _____ many people have gone home.
A. that B. which
C. whose time D. by which time
3. Is this the reason _______ at the meeting for his carelessness in his work
A. he explained B. what he explained
C. how he explained D. why he explained
4. Luckily, we’d brought a road map without ______ we would have lost our way.
A. it B. that
C. this D. which
5. When he was working there he caught a serious illness from _____ effect he still suffers.
A. which B. that
C. whose D. what
6. It’s said that he’s looking for a new job, ______ he can get more money to support his family.
A. when B. where
C. that D. which
7. We are living in an age ______ many things are done on computer.
A. which B. that
C. whose D. when
8. The little time we have together we’ll try _____ wisely.
A. spending it B. to spend it
C. to spend D. spending that
9. The old building, behind _______ was a famous church, was _______ we used to work.
A. that, the place B. it, the place
C. which, where D. what, where
10. We will be shown around the city: schools, museums, and some other places, _______ other visitors seldom go.
A. what B. which
C. where D. when
11. The modern history of Italy dates from 1860, ______ the country became united.
A. when B. if
C. since D. until
12. All of the flowers now raised here have developed from those _____ in the forest.
A. once they grew B. they grew once
C. that once grew D. once grew
13. You could see the runners very well from ______ we stood.
A. which B. where
C. that D. when
14. Recently I bought an ancient Chinese vase, _______ was very reasonable.
A. which price B. the price of which
C. its price D. the price of whose
15. What have you got _____ will help a cold
A. what B. that
C. it D. who
16. He was very angry and I can still remember the way _____ he spoke to me.
A. how B. that
C. what D. which
17. Do you know the man from ________ house the pictures were stolen
A. which B. that
C. what D. whose
18. I can think of many cases _______ students obviously knew a lot of English words and expressions but couldn’t write a good essay.
A. why B. which
C. as D. where
19. Is this all that you need If you married me, I’d give you everything you _____.
A. want B. wanted
C. had wanted D. are wanting
20. I met the teacher in the street yesterday ________ taught me English three years ago.
A. which B. when
C. where D. who
21. He’s got himself into a dangerous situation _____ he is likely to lose control over the plane.
A. where B. which
C. while D. why
22. He made another wonderful discovery, ______ of great importance to science.
A. which I think is B. which I think it is
C. which I think it D. I think is
23. Dorothy was always speaking highly of her role in the play, ____, of course, made the others unhappy.
A. who B. which
C. this D. what
24. Their problem today is somewhat similar to _____ they faced many years ago.
A. that B. which
C. that which D. it
25. I saw some trees the leaves of _____ were black with disease.
A. that B. which
C. it D. what
26. The famous basketball player, _______ tried to make a comeback, attracted a lot of attention.
A. where B. when
C. which D. who
27. When they went into the shop and asked to look at the engagement rings, the girl brought out a cheaper one, _______ she had arranged with James.
A. the which was what B. what was that
C. which was what D. that was that
【答案与解析】
1. 选 C。先行词是 those，可视为 those flowers 之省略。they once grew 前省略了关系代词 which。全句意为：这儿所养的花是由他们曾在森林里种植的花培养出来的。
2. 选D。by which time 引出的是一个非限制性定语从句，其中 by which time 相当于 and by that time。
3. 选 A。注意不能选 D，因为动词 explained 缺宾语。
4. 选 D。which 指 the road map。
5. 选C。from whose effect he still suffers 为修饰 a serious illness 的定语从句，whose 在定语从句中用作定语，修饰 effect。
6. 选B。where 引导定语等于from which。注：one 在此指 a new job。类似地，下面一题的答案是C，因为one that 相当于 a problem that：The problem is _____ has caused us a lot of trouble.
A. one B. that
C. one that D. that one
7. 选 D。先行词是表时间的 age(时代)，由于关系词在定语从句中作状语，故用 when。
8. 选C。该句的正常词序为 We will try to spend the little time we have together wisely.
9. 选C。第一空填 which，指 the old building；第二空填 where，用以引导表语从句。
10. 选 C。先行词是地点名词 places，由于关系词在定语从句中作状语，故用 where。
11. 选A。when 引导的是非限制性定语从句。
12. 选C。that once grew in the forest 为修饰 those 的定语从句。
13. 选B。where 在此相当于 the place where。
14. 选 B。the price of which was very reasonable 为非限制性定语从句，其中的 the price of which 相当于 and its price 或 and the price of it。假若空格前有并列连词 and，则可选 C。
15. 选B。that will help a cold 为修饰 what 的定语从句。比较：Have you got anything that will help a cold 以及 I’ve got nothing that will help a cold.
16. 选B。the way 后不接how 引导的从句，换句说，how 不是关系代词或关系副词，不能引导定语从句。以the way 为先行词的定语从句通常用 that 或 in which 来引导，在非正式文体中也可省略 that 和 in which。
17. 选D。from whose house the pictures were stolen 为修饰 the man 的定语从句，whose 在定语从句中用作定语，修饰 house。
18. 选 D。先行词是 many cases，关系副词 where =in which。
19. 选A。尽管句中用了 if you married me, I’d give you everything 这样的虚拟语气句子，但修饰everything 的定语从句 (that) you want 却要用陈述语语气，因为它是回答前面 Is this all that you need 这一提问的。
20. 选 D。因定语从句缺主语，且关系代词指人，故选D。
21. 选A。where 所引导的为修饰 a dangerous situation 的定语从句。
22. 选 A。选项中的 I think 是插入语，若略去不看便可清楚地看出答案。
23. 选 B。of course 为插入语，若将项其去掉，则答案显然是B。
24. 选C。that which相当于 the problem which。
25. 选B。the leaves of which 相当于 whose leaves。
26. 选 D。先行词是 The famous basketballer(著名的篮球明星)，故要用 who 来引导定语从句，因为其余三项均不用于指人。
27. 选 C。which 引导一个非限制性定语从句，其中 which 指代 a cheaper one，且在定语从句中用作主语。which was what 中的 what引导一个表语从句，它相当于 the one that2012届高考英语语法专题复习讲义荟萃主谓一致
1. I who ________ your English teacher will do my best to help you with your study.
A．am B．is C．are D．be
2. Either the Greek or the Australian ________ the boxing competition.
A．have won B．has won C．are won D．is won
3. As the saying goes， “No news ________ good news.”
A．are B．is C．has D．be
4. Paper money ________ for over a thousand years.
A．have been used B．has been used C．are used D．is using
8. The singer and dancer ________ come to the party tonight.
A．is to B．are to C．are going to D．was to
9. The population of China ________ larger than that of any other country in the
world.
A．are B．is C．have D．has
10. The atmosphere is as much a part of the earth as ________ its soil and water of its
lakes，rivers and oceans.
A．has B．do C．is D．are
11. He was very angry，because everyone except him________ invited to the party.
A．were B．was C．is D．are
12. Either you or one of your students ________ to attend the meeting that is due
tomorrow.
A.are B．is C．have D．be
17. A nice gift，with many flowers ________ to me by my students on Teachers’ Day.
A．is sent B．has sent C．has been sent D．was sent
18. I hoped that somebody ________ going to offer me a lift home.
A．is B．are C．were D．was
19. I have finished a large part of the novel written by Dickens，the rest of which
________ very difficult.
A．is B．are C．was D．were
20. The United States ________ founded in 1776.
A．were B．are C．is D．was
参考答案
1. A 定语从句的谓语动词与先行词保持人称和数的一致。先行词是I，因此定语从句的谓语动词用am。
2. B 并列主语用either…or, neither…nor, not…but, 或 not only…but also连接时，谓语动词的单复数由邻近主语决定，在此句中由the Australian决定。the Australian 指某个人，因此谓语用单数。
3. B 句意为“正如谚语所说，‘没有消息，就是好消息’”，因news为不可数名词，表示单数意义，所以答案为B。
4. B money 为不可数名词，因此谓语用单数，又由“for…years”可知用完成式，所以选B。
5. B 第一个all指人，谓语动词用复数；第二个all指事情，谓语动词用单数。
6. A 集体名词，如people, police作主语时，谓语动词用复数； 但有些集体名词，如furniture, jewelry等作主语时，谓语用单数。
7. B 当quantities修饰名词作主语时谓语动词用复数。句意：大量的新鲜水果和蔬菜从我国船运到全世界。
8. A the singer and dancer指一个人所兼的两个称谓，因此谓语动词用单数。
9. B 当population单独作主语时谓语动词用单数；若前面有具体数词修饰时谓语动词用复数。如：Eighty percent of the population of this country are farmers.这个国家百分之八十的人口是农民。
10. D 此处soil and water是主语，故用are。
11. B 句意：他很生气，因为除他以外的所有人都被邀请参加那次聚会。当主语后面带有except等词时，谓语动词与主语一致，everyone作主语时谓语动词用单数。
12. B 考查就近原则，真正的主语是one of your students，故用is。
13. A 当数词＋表示重量等的名词作主语时谓语动词用单数。
14. C 分数或百分数作主语时，谓语动词必须与分数或百分数后面的名词或代词保持人称和数的一致。
15. B the number of＋复数名词，其主语是number，故谓语动词用单数，意为“……的数量”。
16. D all, most, half, the rest作主语时，谓语动词的数由它们代表的名词决定，若代表可数名词，谓语用复数；否则用单数。
17. D 当主语后面带有with等词语时谓语动词与主语在人称和数上一致，句子的主语是a nice gift，故谓语动词用单数。由句中的时间状语可知应用一般过去时，故答案为D。
18. D somebody为单数，因此谓语用单数。
19. A the rest指代不可数名词或单数可数名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数。
20. D States虽然是复数形式，然而the United States指一个国家，因此谓语用单数。2012届高考英语语法专题复习分类汇编精品讲义句子
1. — Someone wants you on the phone.
— ______ nobody knows I am here. (2011·新课标卷25)
A. Although B. And
C. But D. So
【解析】选C。本题要把握前后两个句子的逻辑关系。前半句为，有人给你打电话；后半句为，没人知道我在这儿，根据句意可知前后两句明显为转折关系，故选C。
2. ______ a strange plant! I've never seen it before. (2011·辽宁卷33)
A. Which B. What
C. How D. Whether
【解析】选B。what引导一个感叹句。
简单句所涉及的考点主要包括感叹句和反意疑问句。
一、感叹句
______ she sings! I have never heard a better voice.
A. How beautiful
B. What beautiful song
C. How beautifully
D. So wonderful
【解析】选C。此为“how＋副词＋主语＋谓语”形式的感叹句。
简单句
感叹句的基本结构特点是：
What ＋ a(n) (＋ adj.) ＋ 单数可数名词(＋ 主语＋ 动词)!
What ＋ adj. ＋ 不可数名词或复数可数名词！
How ＋ adj. /adv. (＋ 主语 ＋ 动词)!
How ＋ adj. ＋ a(n) ＋ 单数可数名词(＋ 主语＋ 动词)!
二、反意疑问句
考点1.主从复合句后面的反意问句
I don't suppose our team might have been beaten by theirs last night, ______？
A. do I B. might it
C. hasn't it D. was it
【解析】选D。陈述部分有I don't suppose时，反意问句应与其后的宾语从句的主谓一致，本句的非推测句为： I don't suppose our team was beaten by theirs last night, 反意问句便是： was it。
如果陈述部分是主从复合句，后面的反意问句通常与主句的主谓一致。如果主句的谓语动词是think, believe, suppose, imagine, guess, expect等，后面的反意问句要注意3种情况：
1. 如果主语是第一人称I, 后面的反意问句需与从句的主谓一致。
2. 如果主句的主语是其他人称，则后面的反意问句常需与主句的主谓一致。
3. 如果主句的动词是否定式，后面的反意问句要用肯定式。
考点2.强调结构后面的反意问句
It was at the gate that you met her, ______？
A. wasn't it B. was it
C. didn't you D. did you
【解析】选A。强调结构“It is / was＋被强调部分＋that …”后的反意问句需与It is / was一致。
强调结构“It is / was＋被强调部分＋that …”后的反意问句需与that前面的主谓一致。
考点3.并列句后面的反意问句
The man works hard and he is the best worker in his factory, ______？
A. does he B. doesn't he
C. is he D. isn't he
【解析】选D。两个并列句后面的反意问句的主谓一般需与后一个分句保持主谓一致。
两个并列句(常见的连词有： or, and, but, while, for等)后面的反意问句的主谓一般需与距离它近的那个分句的主谓一致。
考点4.否定句后面的反意问句
He had little idea that it was getting so serious, ______？
A. didn't he B. did he
C. wasn't it D. was it
【解析】选B。陈述句是含有否定词little的否定句，反意问句用肯定形式。
1. 前面的陈述部分有半否定词hardly, rarely, scarcely, few, little, seldom等时，反意问句用肯定形式。
2. 陈述部分虽有否定前(后)缀词(如： dis ， in ， un ， less)时，反意问句仍要用否定形式。
考点5.祈使句后面的反意问句
Lily, help me put up the picture on the wall, ______？
A. will you B. don't you
C. are you D. didn't you
【解析】选A。陈述句是肯定祈使句，反问部分用will you。
1. Let's开头(包括听话者), 反意问句用shall we；Let us开头(不包括听话者), 反意问句用will you。
2. 其他形式的肯定祈使句后面，一般用will you。
考点6.情态动词后面的反意问句
— I think it's high time that she made up her mind.
— The police must have known all about this, ______？
A. mustn't they B. haven't they
C. mustn't it D. hasn't it
【解析】选B。陈述部分用“must(may，might)＋v. ed”表示推测时，若句中不带有明显的过去时间的状语，问句部分动词应该与must(may, might)后的动词形式保持一致。
情态动词用于推测，后面的反意问句的谓语一般要与情态动词后面的动词相一致。
考点7. have后面的反意问句
It's seven o'clock now. We have to leave for the cinema, ______？
A. haven't we B. don't we
C. isn't it D. wasn't it
【答案】选B。
1. have表“有”时，后面的反意问句的谓语可用have或do的适当形式。
2. have表“让、吃、患”等意思时，后面的反意问句的谓语用do的适当形式。
3. have to表“不得不”时，后面的反意问句的谓语要用do的适当形式。
4. have ＋ done构成完成时时，后面的反意问句的谓语要用have的适当形式。
考点8. 其他几种特殊的反意问句
例1: There will be an English party tomorrow, ______？
A. isn't there B. isn't it
C. won't there D. won't it
【解析】选C。在there be句型中，反意疑问句的主语用there, 反意疑问句谓语部分视具体的助动词、情态动词或系动词而定。
考点8. 其他几种特殊的反意问句
例2: It's the first time that he has been to Australia, ______？(辽宁锦州一中高中2011届高三第五次模拟卷)
A. isn'the B. hasn't he
C. isn't it D. hasn't it
【解析】选C。由句型it's the first time that ＋从句可知，主语是it, be是is。因此用isn't it。
考点8. 其他几种特殊的反意问句
例3: — Alice, you feed the bird today, ______？
— But I fed it yesterday.
A. do you B. will you
C. didn't you D. don't you
【解析】选B。Alice 为称呼语， 后接一个祈使句，因此用will you。
1. 陈述部分是There be结构时，反意问句的主语用there来充当。
2. I wish表示愿望，后面的反意问句常用may I。
3. I'm 开头，后面的反意问句常用aren't I。
4. 以So, Oh开头的句子，若是肯定句，其后的反意问句也用肯定；若是否定句，其后的反意问句也用否定。
5. 在句型It's the first/second/third…time that从句中，在It's＋时间段＋since从句中，以及It won't be long before从句中等等，反意部分由前面It＋be来决定，与从句的谓语动词无关。
考点1.转折并列句
例1: We thought there were 35 students in the dining hall, ______， in fact, there were 40.
A. while B. whether
C. what D. which
【解析】选A。分析两句的关系可知应该用表示对比的连词while。
并列句
例2: Excuse me for breaking in, ______ I have some news for you.
A. so B. and
C. but D. that
【解析】选C。 but 放在表示歉意的话之后，只起连接作用； but 的语义非常丰富，用法灵活多变。随着高考语境性意义的加强， but 出现的频率也越来越高，因为它在试题中对正确答案的选择起着重要的制约作用。下面是 but 的一些基本用法。
一、but 用作并列连词，意为“但是”，“然而”，表示转折意义。
Rick made some more records, but he wasn't as popular as he had been before.
里克虽然灌制了更多唱片，但不像以前那样受欢迎。
此时要注意 but 与 however 的区别。 however 表示“可是”，“但是”的意义时，常用作副词，可以放在句首、句中、句尾，并常用逗号将它与句子分开。
However，he didn't make his mark in the end.
然而，他终未成功。
二、 but 可置于表示歉意的话(如 Excuse me 或 I'm sorry )之后，提出请求或说出可能触犯对方的话，它没有实际意义，只起连接作用，可以省去。
I am sorry, but I don't think I know you.
很抱歉，我想我不认识你。
Excuse me, but can you tell me how to surf the net
劳驾，你能告诉我怎么上网吗？
主要由but(但是), yet(可是), while(而，却)等连词连接。
考点2.选择并列句
Bring the flowers into a warm room ______ they'll soon open. (2011·辽宁卷31)
A. or B. and
C. but D. for
【解析】选B。and表并列关系。此句考查句型：祈使句＋and ＋陈述句。
主要由or(或者，还是，否则), either…or…(不是……就是……), neither…nor…(既不……也不……), otherwise(要不然)等连词连接。
考点3.联合并列句
______， and I'll get the work finished.
A. Have one more hour B. One more hour
C. Given one more hour D. If I have one more hour
【解析】选B。从句子结构上看， and连接了两个分句， 两句间存在着一种顺承关系。其中前一分句为不完整句子，即一个名词短语，表示一种条件或假设，相当于if条件状语从句，该句相当于If I am given one more hour, I'll get the work finished. 后一分句表示一种结果或推论。
一、祈使句
1. 祈使句主要用于请求，发出邀请，给予指示、忠告或警告，也可用于发出命令等。
2. 祈使句的特点是：一般不出现主语(you), 但有时为了指明向谁发出请求或命令，也可以说出主语；谓语动词一律用原形；否定式一律在动词前面加don't。
二、句型中陈述句的时态或语气决定着祈使句表示的条件性质。
1. 当陈述句是一般将来时或一般现在时的时候， 祈使句是真实条件句。
Work hard, and you can make rapid progress in your study.
努力学习，你将很快取得进步。
2. 当陈述句的谓语动词是would / should / could / might ＋ 动词原形或完成体时，祈使句表示非真实条件句。
Come tomorrow and I would tell you everything.
明天来，我就告诉你所有的事情。
三、“祈使句 ＋ and ＋ 陈述句”句型的3种变化形式
1. “祈使句 ＋ 破折号 ＋ 陈述句”
Try some of this juice — perhaps you'll like it.
尝尝这种果汁，也许你会喜欢的。
2. “名词词组 ＋ and ＋ 陈述句”
名词词组中通常含有more, another, further, earlier等词。
It is really very dangerous. One more step, and the baby will fall into the well.
真危险。再多迈一步， 这个小孩儿就掉进井里了。
Another ￡500, and I could buy a car.
假如我再有500英镑， 就能买辆小汽车了。
One step further and you'll lost.
再多走一步， 你就会迷失方向了。
A few minutes earlier, and I could have seen the famous scientist.
要是我早来几分钟， 就能见到那位著名的科学家了。
3. “祈使句 ＋ or ＋ 陈述句”
or表示“否则”、“要不然的话”， or可用or else或otherwise替换， 从反面来预测结果。
Take the chance, or you will regret it.
抓住机会吧， 否则你会遗憾的。
Watch your step, or else you might fall into the water.
留神脚下， 不然你会掉进水里的。
Do as you're told, otherwise you'll be in trouble.
叫你怎么做就怎么做， 否则你会有麻烦的。
主要由and, not only…but also…(不但……而且……), when(＝and just at this time就在这时)等连词连接。
考点4.因果并列句
It must have rained last night, ______ the ground is wet this morning.
A. because B. since
C. as D. for
【解析】选D。表示对前一分句的内容加以推断性的原因，用for。2012届高考英语语法专题复习讲义荟萃定语从句
1. He is a teacher，________ is the admiration of all the young people nowadays.
A．who B．which C．that D．what
2. After living in Beijing for fifty years she returned to the village________ she grew up.
A．which B．where C．that D．when
3. We all believe that the hours ________ the children spend in their one way relationship with television people undoubtedly affect their relationships with real life people.
A．that B．when C．in which D．on which
4. In the new city there wasn’t a single person________ the poor boy could turn for help.
A．that B．who C．from whom D．to whom
8. The boss paid us $10 for washing ten cars，most of________ hadn’t been cleaned for at least half a year.
A．these B．them C．that D．which
9. I suggest that we should take part in more such activities in future ________ we did yesterday.
A．which B．as C．that D．than
10. Mary was always singing high praise of her role in the office，________ of course，made the others unhappy.
A．who B．which C．this D．what
11. Our teacher is always busy preparing lessons until 11 o’clock at night，________ we students have gone to sleep.
A．that time B．by which time C．by that time D．which time
12. We visited a factory________ makes bikes for children.
A．where B．which C．in which D．at which
13. It was quite a serious accident，________caused by careless driving.
A．which I think was B．I think which was
C．which I think it was D．I think which it was
14. ________ is known to everybody，light travels faster than sound.
A．It B．As C．Which D．What
15. She is the only one of the students in our class________ passed the exam this time.
A．who hasn’t B．who haven’t C．who didn’t D．who doesn’t
18. Alice received an invitation from her boss，and ________ came as a surprise.
A．what B．that C．which D．he
19. The factory ________ we see today is no longer the one ________ it was ten years ago.
A．that; who B．/; that C．which; which D．where; that
20. The weather turned out to be very good；________ was more than we could expect.
A．what B. which C．that D．this
参考答案
1. B which引导非限制性定语从句，并指代前面整个主句。句意：他当老师，这一点是目前所有年轻人羡慕的。
2. B where引导定语从句，并在从句中作地点状语。
3. A 关系代词或关系副词替代先行词必须在定语从句中作成分，因此“缺什么成分填什么成分”是解答关于定语从句的题目的关键。从句中的spend是及物动词，意为“度过”，因此所填的词应该作它的宾语。故答案为A。
4. D turn to sb. for help为固定句式，意思是“求助于”。
5. C in the way意为“以……方式”，in可以省略。当先行词是way时可用in which, that或不填，因此答案为C。
6. B which可引导非限制性定语从句，that则不能。
7. C 名词或代词＋of＋关系代词whom/which可以引导非限制性定语从句，表示部分与整体的关系，作用相当于whose＋名词，of which the banks＝the banks of which＝whose banks, 因此答案为C。
8. D which可引导非限制性定语从句；若most前加and，或改逗号为分号，则选B。
9. B 当先行词被such修饰时，关系代词用as。
10. B which引导非限制性定语从句，指整个主句所述内容。
11. B 句意：我们老师总是忙着备课到晚上11点钟，那时我们已经睡了。by意为“到……时(为止)”，which time指代11 o’clock at night。
12. B which在定语从句中作主语。
13. A 考查由which引导的非限制性定语从句，which替代先行词accident在定语从句中作主语。I think是插入语，放在which后面。
14. B as引导的非限制性定语从句可位于句首，而which却不能。
15. A 根据句中的passed可排除C项和D项。当先行词被the only one修饰时，定语从句的谓语动词用单数，故答案为A。
16. C which引导非限制性定语从句，并在定语从句中作宾语。
17. B 定语从句一定不要忽视标点符号的作用。由题干中的逗号可知此从句是非限制性定语从句，因此答案为B。
18. B 因为有and，所以用that 表示前句内容；若去掉 and，则应选C。
19. B 第一空格用关系代词which或that, 在定语从句中作宾语时可省略；第二空格当先行词是不定代词，关系代词在定语从句中作表语时用that。
20. C 分号的存在表明了两句的并列关系。若改分号为逗号，则应选B。
